6DD1683-0BE5 - Siemens - Product.Network

Contents, Foreword

General technical data

Subracks

CPU module

Coupling memory module

Input/output modules

Communications support

modules

Technology subrack

Program memory /

Interface modules

Plug-in cables

Operator control panel OP2

Index

Hardware

SIMADYN D

Manual

Edition 04.2011

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

This Manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal

safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are

highlighted in the Manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to

the level of danger:

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or

serious injury.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or

serious injury.

CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, may result in property damage.

NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided,

may result in an undesireable result or state.

Note the following:

This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the

catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components

from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

SIMATIC and SIMADYN D are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer

to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Safety guidelines

Correct usage

Marken

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.

Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights

created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,

are reserved.

Siemens AG

A&D AS CC DC

Frauenauracher Straße 80

91056 Erlangen

We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with

the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be

precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement.

However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any

necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.

Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.

 Siemens AG 2006

Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E01114837-02

Hardware - SIMADYN D iii

Edition 04.2011

Editions

SIMADYN D

Manual

Hardware

Edition 04.2011

NOTE Please note that the current edition of this documentation contains

different editions of the individual chapters. The following overview tells

you when a chapter was revised the last time.

Chapter Edition

Foreword Edition 12.2004

1 General technical data Edition 08.2005

2 Subracks Edition 04.2011

3 CPU module Edition 03.2001

4 Coupling memory module Edition 03.2001

5 Input/output modules Edition 12.2004

6 Communications support modules Edition 12.2004

7 Technology subrack Edition 03.2001

8 Program memory modules / Interface modules Edition 04.2011

9 Plug-in cables Edition 06.2002

10 Operator control panel OP2 Edition 03.2001

Overview

(chapter editions)

Editions

iv Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 12.2003

Hardware - SIMADYN D v

Edition 12.2004

Foreword

This Manual explains the principle use and functions of the STEP 7

automation software with the main focus on the appropriate technological

and drive control components T400, FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D,

SIMATIC TDC or D7-SYS.

TDC: Technology and Drives Control

This Manual addresses programmers and commissioning engineers.

General knowhow regarding automation technology is required in order to

understand the contents of the Manual

This Manual is valid for SIMATIC D7-SYS Version 6.2.

If you have questions relating to the use of the products described in the

Manual, which cannot be answered here, then please contact your local

Siemens office. You can also call the Hotline:

• Tel.: +49 (180) 5050-222

• Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223

• e-mail: adsupport@siemens.com

Appropriate training courses are available in order to make it easier to get

to know the SIMADYN D automation system. Please contact the central

Training Center in D-Erlangen (I&S IS INA TC):

• Tel.: +49 (9131) 7-27689, -27972

• Fax: +49 (9131) 7-28172

• Internet: www.siemens.de/sibrain

• Intranet: http://info-tc.erlm.siemens.de/

NOTE This user part of the Manual does not include any detailed

information/instructions with individual descriptions, but is only intended

to provide a basic procedure. More detailed information on the dialog

boxes in the software and how they are handled is provided in the

appropriate online help.

Purpose of this

Manual

Basic knowledge

required

Validity of the

Manual

Additional support

Training Center

Foreword

vi Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

This manual is part of the overall documentation for the technological and

drive control components T400, FM 458, SIMADYN D, SIMATIC TDC

and SIMATIC D7-SYS:

Title Content

System and

communications

configuring D7-SYS

The first project in a few steps

This Section provides an extremely simple entry into the methodology when

assembling and programming the SIMATIC TDC/SIMADYN D control

system. It is especially conceived for first-time users of a control system.

System software

This Section provides basic know-how about the structure of the operating

system and an application program of a CPU. It should be used to obtain an

overview of the programming methodology, and basis for configuring user

programs.

Communications configuring

This section provides you with basic know-how about the communication

possibilities and how you configure links to the communication partners.

Changeover from STRUC V4.x to D7-SYS

Essential features are included in this section, which have changed over

STRUC V4.x with the introduction of SIMATIC D7-SYS.

STEP 7 option packages

for D7-SYS

Basis software

This section explains the essential use and the functions of the STEP 7

automation software. For first users, it provides an overview on configuring,

programming and commissioning a station.

When working with the basis software, you can access the online help which

provides you with support when it comes to detailed questions on using the

software.

CFC

The CFC language (Continuous Function Chart) allows you to graphically

interconnect blocks.

When working with the particular software, you can also use the online help

which can answer detailed questions regarding the use of the

editors/compiler.

SFC

Configuring sequence controls using SFC (Sequential Function Chart) of

SIMATIC S7.

In the SFC editor, you generate a sequence chart using graphic resources.

The SFC elements of the chart are then positioned according to specific

rules.

Hardware The complete hardware spectrum is described as reference in this Manuals.

Function blocks These Reference Manuals provide you with an overview of selected function

blocks for the associated technological and drive control components T400,

FM 458-1 DP, SIMADYN D and SIMATIC TDC.

Information

overview

Foreword

Hardware - SIMADYN D vii

Edition 12.2004

As first time user, we recommend that this Manual is used as follows:

• Please read the first section on using the software in order to get to

know some of the terminology and basic procedure.

• Then use the particular sections of the Manual if you wish to carry-out

certain processing steps (e.g. loading programs).

If you have already executed a small project, and have gained some

experience, then you can read individual sections of the Manual in order

to get up to speed about a specific subject.

Can be accessed globally at any time of the day:

World-wide

(Nürnberg)

Technical Support

Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365 days

Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222

Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223

E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com

GMT: +1:00

Europe / Africa

(Nürnberg)

Authorization

Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00

Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222

Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223

E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com

GMT: +1:00

United States

(Johnson City)

Technical Support and

Authorization

Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00

Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522

Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289

E-Mail:

simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com

GMT: -5:00

Asia / Australia

(Peking)

Technical Support and

Authorization

Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00

Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75

Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74

E-Mail: adsupport.asia@siemens.com

GMT: +8:00

Technical Support and Authorization speak generally German and English.

Guide

A&D Technical

Support

Foreword

viii Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Hardware - SIMADYN D vii

Edition 05.2006

Contens

Foreword ......................................................................................................................................... v

1 General technical data........................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines ............................................................................ 1-2

1.1.1 Definitions .............................................................................................................. 1-2

1.1.1.1 Qualified personnel................................................................................................ 1-2

1.1.1.2 Danger and warning information ........................................................................... 1-3

1.1.2 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1-4

1.1.3 Use and operation ................................................................................................. 1-4

1.1.4 Machinery Directive ............................................................................................... 1-5

1.1.4.1 SIMADYN D outputs .............................................................................................. 1-5

1.1.4.2 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel........................................... 1-6

1.1.4.3 CE Mark ................................................................................................................. 1-6

1.1.4.4 Connecting external voltages ................................................................................ 1-6

1.1.5 Mounting ................................................................................................................ 1-6

1.1.6 Cables.................................................................................................................... 1-6

1.1.7 Potential bonding ................................................................................................... 1-6

1.1.8 Principle when connecting components ................................................................ 1-7

1.1.9 Potential bonding rail ............................................................................................. 1-7

1.1.10 Actual example of a multi-motor drive ................................................................... 1-8

1.1.11 Protective grounding.............................................................................................. 1-9

1.1.12 Radios.................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.1.13 Cabinet................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.1.14 Mounting clearances............................................................................................ 1-10

1.1.15 Power loss in the cabinet..................................................................................... 1-11

1.1.16 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 1-12

1.1.17 Subracks .............................................................................................................. 1-13

1.1.18 Cables.................................................................................................................. 1-14

1.1.19 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters.................................................... 1-14

1.2 ESD guidelines .................................................................................................... 1-15

1.2.1 What is ESD?....................................................................................................... 1-15

1.2.2 Handling ESD modules........................................................................................ 1-15

1.2.3 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules ............................................. 1-16

1.2.4 Transporting modules .......................................................................................... 1-17

1.3 Ambient conditions .............................................................................................. 1-18

Contens

viii Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

2 Subracks ................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V............................................................................................. 2-2

2.1.1 Power supply ......................................................................................................... 2-2

2.1.2 Voltage monitoring functions ................................................................................. 2-3

2.1.3 Battery back-up ...................................................................................................... 2-4

2.1.4 Backplane bus .......................................................................................................2-5

2.1.5 Ventilation/cooling.................................................................................................. 2-6

2.1.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................... 2-7

2.1.7 Technical data........................................................................................................ 2-8

2.1.8 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-10

2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24................................................................................... 2-13

2.2.1 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-13

2.2.2 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-15

2.2.3 Battery back-up .................................................................................................... 2-16

2.2.4 Backplane buses.................................................................................................. 2-17

2.2.5 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-19

2.2.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-19

2.2.7 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-21

2.2.8 Dimension drawings............................................................................................. 2-23

2.3 Subrack SRT400.................................................................................................. 2-26

2.3.1 Power supply ....................................................................................................... 2-26

2.3.2 Voltage monitoring functions ............................................................................... 2-27

2.3.3 Battery back-up .................................................................................................... 2-28

2.3.4 Backplane bus .....................................................................................................2-28

2.3.5 Ventilation/cooling................................................................................................ 2-28

2.3.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 2-28

2.3.7 Technical data...................................................................................................... 2-29

3 CPU module ............................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 CPU module PM5 .................................................................................................. 3-2

3.1.1 Supplementary components .................................................................................. 3-7

3.1.2 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 3-7

3.1.3 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-7

3.1.4 Technical data........................................................................................................ 3-8

3.1.5 Connector assignments ......................................................................................... 3-9

3.1.6 Connection diagram.............................................................................................3-10

3.2 CPU module PM6 ................................................................................................ 3-11

3.2.1 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 3-15

3.2.2 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 3-15

3.2.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 3-15

3.2.4 Connection diagram.............................................................................................3-16

3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x.............................................................. 3-17

Contens

Hardware - SIMADYN D ix

Ausgabe 05.2006

4 Coupling memory module..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4..................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module.......................................... 4-3

4.1.2 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4 ........................................................................ 4-7

5 Input/output modules............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Input/output modules EA12 ................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 Supplementary components.................................................................................. 5-2

5.1.2 Connector assignment X5 ..................................................................................... 5-4

5.1.3 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 5-4

5.1.4 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 5-5

5.1.5 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 5-6

5.2 Input/output module EB11 ..................................................................................... 5-7

5.2.1 Supplementary components.................................................................................. 5-8

5.2.2 Connector- and terminal assignment..................................................................... 5-9

5.2.2.1 Terminal assignment for SC55 .............................................................................. 5-9

5.2.2.2 Terminal assignment for SC13 ............................................................................ 5-11

5.2.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-13

5.2.4 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-14

5.2.5 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-15

5.3 Expansion module IT41 ....................................................................................... 5-16

5.3.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-19

5.3.2 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-20

5.3.3 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-22

5.3.3.1 Connector assignment X7 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-23

5.3.3.2 Connector assignment X7 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-25

5.3.4 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-27

5.3.5 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-27

5.3.6 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-28

5.3.7 Connecting diagrams........................................................................................... 5-31

5.4 Expansion module IT42 ....................................................................................... 5-33

5.4.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-34

5.4.2 Connector assignment X6 ................................................................................... 5-35

5.4.3 Connector assignment X7 ................................................................................... 5-35

5.4.4 Connector assignment X8 ................................................................................... 5-37

5.4.4.1 Connector assignment X8 for SC49 .................................................................... 5-37

5.4.4.2 Connector assignment X8 for SC54 .................................................................... 5-39

5.4.5 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 5-41

5.4.6 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-41

5.4.7 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 5-42

5.4.8 Connecting diagram............................................................................................. 5-44

5.5 Converter control ITDC........................................................................................ 5-45

5.5.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 5-48

5.5.2 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 5-49

Contens

x Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

5.5.3 Connector assignment X6 ...................................................................................5-50

5.5.4 Connector assignment X7 ...................................................................................5-50

5.5.5 Technical data...................................................................................................... 5-53

5.5.6 Mounting/Installation ............................................................................................ 5-54

5.5.7 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 5-55

5.5.8 Connecting diagrams ........................................................................................... 5-55

6 Communications support modules ...................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Communications support modules CS .................................................................. 6-2

6.1.1 Communications support module CS7 .................................................................. 6-2

6.1.1.1 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-4

6.1.1.2 Technical data........................................................................................................ 6-6

6.1.1.3 Connecting diagram............................................................................................... 6-7

6.1.2 Communications support module CS8 .................................................................. 6-8

6.1.2.1 Application information and noise immunity .......................................................... 6-9

6.1.2.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-11

6.1.2.3 Connection diagram.............................................................................................6-11

6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11................................................................................... 6-12

6.2.1 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-13

6.2.2 Connector assignment of the interfaces ..............................................................6-13

6.2.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-14

6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22.................................................. 6-15

6.3.1 Slave connection.................................................................................................. 6-16

6.3.2 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-19

6.3.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-19

6.3.4 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-20

6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL .................................................................................... 6-21

6.4.1 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 6-21

6.4.2 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 6-21

6.4.3 Application information and noise immunity ........................................................ 6-21

6.4.4 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-22

6.5 Interface module SS1 .......................................................................................... 6-23

6.5.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-26

6.5.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-26

6.6 Interface module SS2 .......................................................................................... 6-27

6.6.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-27

6.6.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-28

6.7 Interface module SS31 ........................................................................................ 6-29

6.7.1 Pin assignment .................................................................................................... 6-29

6.7.2 Technical data...................................................................................................... 6-30

6.8 Communications module SS4 ............................................................................. 6-31

6.8.1 Connecting programmers or PC .......................................................................... 6-31

6.8.2 USS connection for OP2, VD1............................................................................. 6-33

Contens

Hardware - SIMADYN D xi

Ausgabe 05.2006

6.8.3 Supplementary components................................................................................ 6-36

6.8.4 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-36

6.8.5 SS4 diagnostic functions ..................................................................................... 6-37

6.8.6 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-39

6.8.7 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-40

6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 .................................................................. 6-41

6.9.1 Supplementary components................................................................................ 6-42

6.9.2 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity............................................................. 6-43

6.9.3 Diagnostics LED .................................................................................................. 6-43

6.9.4 Connector assignment X5 ................................................................................... 6-44

6.9.5 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 6-46

7 Technology subrack ..............................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 ................................................................................ 7-2

7.2 Technology module T400 ...................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 General features .................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.2 Mechanical design, terminals ................................................................................ 7-4

7.2.3 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation ................................ 7-4

7.2.3.1 Pulse encoder 2..................................................................................................... 7-5

7.2.4 Absolute value encoders ....................................................................................... 7-7

7.2.5 Serial interfaces ..................................................................................................... 7-7

7.2.5.1 Bus termination...................................................................................................... 7-8

7.2.5.2 Communications switch ......................................................................................... 7-8

7.2.6 Synchronizing possibilities..................................................................................... 7-9

7.2.7 Parameters .......................................................................................................... 7-10

7.2.8 Terminal assignment ........................................................................................... 7-10

7.2.9 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 7-12

8 Program memory modules / Interface modules.................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 ..................................................... 8-2

8.1.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Interface module SE13.1 ....................................................................................... 8-4

8.2.1 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-5

8.2.2 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-5

8.2.3 Connector assignment X1 ..................................................................................... 8-6

8.3 Interface module SE26.1 ....................................................................................... 8-7

8.3.1 Application information .......................................................................................... 8-8

8.3.2 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.3 Connector assignment........................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.4 Diagram ............................................................................................................... 8-10

8.4 Interface module SB10 ........................................................................................ 8-11

8.4.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-12

8.4.2 Application information ........................................................................................ 8-13

Contens

xii Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

8.4.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-14

8.4.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-15

8.4.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-16

8.5 Interface module SB60 ........................................................................................ 8-17

8.5.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-18

8.5.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-18

8.5.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-19

8.5.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-20

8.5.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-21

8.6 Interface module SB61 ........................................................................................ 8-22

8.6.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-23

8.6.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-24

8.6.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-26

8.6.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-27

8.6.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-28

8.7 Interface module SB70 ........................................................................................ 8-29

8.7.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-30

8.7.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-31

8.7.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-32

8.7.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-33

8.7.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-34

8.8 Interface module SB71 ........................................................................................ 8-35

8.8.1 Signals ................................................................................................................. 8-36

8.8.2 Application information......................................................................................... 8-37

8.8.3 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-38

8.8.4 Connector assignment......................................................................................... 8-39

8.8.5 Block diagram ......................................................................................................8-40

8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 ..................................................... 8-41

8.9.1 Function description............................................................................................. 8-42

8.9.2 Supplementary components ................................................................................ 8-43

8.9.3 Application information......................................................................................... 8-44

8.9.4 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2............................................................................ 8-44

8.9.5 Technical data...................................................................................................... 8-46

9 Plug-in cables ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 General information ............................................................................................... 9-2

9.2 Cable types ............................................................................................................9-4

Contens

Hardware - SIMADYN D xiii

Ausgabe 05.2006

10 Operator control panel OP2 ................................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 Function overview................................................................................................ 10-2

10.2 Process data handling ......................................................................................... 10-3

10.2.1 General information ............................................................................................. 10-3

10.2.2 Behavior at run-up ............................................................................................... 10-3

10.2.3 Operator control overview for process data handling.......................................... 10-4

10.3 Binary value processing....................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.1 Message system processing ............................................................................... 10-6

10.3.2 Message on the display....................................................................................... 10-7

10.3.3 Message print-out ................................................................................................ 10-8

10.4 System operation............................................................................................... 10-10

10.4.1 Function overview.............................................................................................. 10-10

10.4.2 Parameterizing the message system processing.............................................. 10-11

10.4.3 Parameterizing for process data........................................................................ 10-12

10.4.4 Parameterizing for the USS interface ................................................................ 10-13

10.4.5 Parameterization for the printer ......................................................................... 10-14

10.4.6 End of system operation .................................................................................... 10-15

10.4.7 Parameterizing the display options.................................................................... 10-15

10.4.8 Self-test.............................................................................................................. 10-15

10.5 System run-up.................................................................................................... 10-18

10.5.1 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D.......................................... 10-18

10.6 Handling OP2 errors .......................................................................................... 10-20

10.6.1 System messages ............................................................................................. 10-20

10.6.2 Operating messages.......................................................................................... 10-21

10.7 Front panel......................................................................................................... 10-24

10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting....................................................... 10-25

10.9 Battery change................................................................................................... 10-26

10.10 Connecting elements ......................................................................................... 10-26

10.11 Power supply ..................................................................................................... 10-27

10.12 Baud rates.......................................................................................................... 10-27

10.13 Cables and connectors...................................................................................... 10-27

10.14 Using a printer with OP2.................................................................................... 10-29

10.14.1 Configuring the printer ....................................................................................... 10-29

10.14.2 Printer connection.............................................................................................. 10-29

10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips ......................................................... 10-30

Index .............................................................................................................................................. I-1

Contens

xiv Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-1

Edition 08.2005

1 General technical data

1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines 1-2

1.2 ESD guidelines 1-15

1.3 Ambient conditions 1-18

Overview

General technical data

1-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1 Installation and EMC guidelines

NOTE The information in this Manual does not purport to cover all details or

variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency

to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.

Should further information be desired or should particular problems

arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes,

please contact your local Siemens office.

Further, the contents of this Manual shall not become a part of or

modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship.

The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The

warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole

warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create

new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.

1.1.1 Definitions

1.1.1.1 Qualified personnel

For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, a „Qualified person“ is

someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and

operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must

have the following qualifications, for example:

1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and

tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety

procedures.

2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in

accordance with established safety procedures.

3. Trained in rendering first aid

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-3

Edition 08.2005

1.1.1.2 Danger and warning information

DANGER For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Danger“ indicates

death, severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will

result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Warning“ indicates

death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper

precautions are not taken.

CAUTION For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Caution“ indicates

that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper

precautions are not taken.

NOTE For the purpose of this Manual, „Note“ indicates information about the

product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is

essential to highlight.

CAUTION This board contains components which can be destroyed by

electrostatic discharge. Prior to touching any electronics board, your

body must be electrically discharged. This can be simply done by

touching a conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e.g.

bare metal cabinet components, socket protective conductor contact).

WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during

operation.

Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal

injury or property damage.

It is especially important that the warning information in all of the

relevant Operating Instructions/Instruction Manuals are strictly

observed.

General technical data

1-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1.2 Introduction

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device

to function, fault-free in a specified electromagnetic environment without

influencing the environment in an inadmissible fashion.

This design- and EMC guideline supplements the documentation on the

individual components.

The SIMADYN D control system consists of individual components (e. g.

subracks, modules, interface modules, operator control panels, position

transmitters). The components can be installed in the widest range of

system configurations according to individual requirements. When the

components are arranged in a distributed fashion (decentral topology) a

noisy environment cannot be neglected. Thus, specific requirements are

placed on the design and EMC of the system.

EMC represents a quality feature for

• Intrinsic noise immunity: Immunity against internal electrical noise

and disturbances

• External noise immunity: Immunity against external electromagnetic

noise

• Noise emission level: Influencing the environment due to

electromagnetic radiation

In order to achieve the highest possible operational reliability and safety

and noise immunity for a complete system (closed-loop control and drive

motor) the control manufacturer and user (including end customers) must

take certain measures.

Perfect functioning of SIMADYN D can only be guaranteed and the legal

requirements fulfilled (89/336/EC) if all of these measures are observed.

1.1.3 Use and operation

SIMADYN D components are designed for use in industrial environments

in accordance with EN 50081-2 and

EN 50082-2. They may not be operated or connected to the public low-

voltage network.

What is EMC ?

Operational

reliability and noise

immunity

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-5

Edition 08.2005

1.1.4 Machinery Directive

In accordance with the Machinery Directive 89/392/EC, it should be

ensured that if SIMADYN D fails or executes an incorrect function, that

this does not result in the machine/system going into a potentially

hazardous condition. This must always be taken into account when

configuring the machine/system.

The system may not be commissioned until it has been proven that the

final product is in conformance with the Directive.

The Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EC is only applicable for products with

supply voltages of ≥ 50 V AC and/or > 75V DC.

For SIMADYN D, this involves the following components:

• SP 7 6DD 1683-0BB0

• SP 8.5 6DD 1683-0BC0

• SP 9.5 6DD 1683-0BE5

• SP 22.5 6DD 1683-0CC5

• SP 23.5 6DD 1683-0CD5

• SB 60 6DD 1681-0AF4

• SB 70 6DD 1681-0AG2

• SRT 400 6DD 1662-0CG0

These components correspond to the requirements of the Low-Voltage

Directive.

WARNING Open equipment

SIMADYN D is regarded as open equipment. This means that you

must always install SIMADYN D in a cubicle, cabinet or electrical

control room that can only be accessed using a key or tool. Only

trained or authorized personnel are allowed access to such

cubicles, cabinets or electrical operating rooms.

1.1.4.1 SIMADYN D outputs

DANGER When the equipment is powered-up or powered -on, the outputs

have undefined statuses while the power supply voltages are

running-up. This fact must be taken into account when designing

the system.

Low-Voltage

Directive

General technical data

1-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1.4.2 Professionally-trained and knowledgeable personnel

Only professionally-trained, knowledgeable personnel may configure,

install, commission and operate SIMADYN D.

1.1.4.3 CE Mark

SIMADYN D components have no CE Mark for the following reasons:

• they cannot be practically used autonomously

• they are not generally available

• they can only be used by specially-trained personnel

NOTE If a CE Mark is required, this is the responsibility of the manufacturer of

the machine/complete system.

1.1.4.4 Connecting external voltages

If external voltages (e. g. pulse encoders) are connected to SIMADYN D

inputs, which are supplied from an external power supply, then this

external supply must also be shutdown when the SIMADYN D power

supply is shutdown or fails.

1.1.5 Mounting

SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet, enclosed

on all sides.

1.1.6 Cables

All signal cables which are connected to SIMADYN D must be screened.

1.1.7 Potential bonding

In order to ensure disturbance-free operation, the components which are

connected and communicate with one another may not be at different

potentials. This means that all components must be connected with one

another through potential bonding cables.

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-7

Edition 08.2005

1.1.8 Principle when connecting components

All of the components (subracks, power supplies etc.), which are

connected using signal cables, must also be connected with potential

bonding cables (exception: Components with fiber-optic cable

connections).

Subrack

Potential bondin

conductor

EBG

Subrack

1.1.9 Potential bonding rail

A potential bonding- or grounding rail must be provided in each cabinet to

allow simple wiring.

All of the internal and external components must be connected to this

potential bonding- and grounding rail.

SIMADYN D

Schaltschrank

Switching cubicle

< 2 m

LEISTUNGS-

KOMPONENTEN

POWER

COMPONENTS

fest mit Schrankholm

verbunden

connected fixed

with cubicle beam

Basic circuit

General technical data

1-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1.10 Actual example of a multi-motor drive

Schaltschrank n

Switching cubicle n

Schirmschiene

(Zackenschiene)

Ground bus

P24 M

Erd-/Potentialausgleichsschiene

Earth circuit-connector

Schaltschrank 2

Switching cubicle 2

Schaltschrank 1

Switching cubicle 1

Potentialausgleichsleitung

Voltage equalazing cable

16 mm2

P24M

External power supply

Externe SV

Interface Modul

Interface modul

Externe Verbindungen

External connections

< 2 m

6 mm2

Externe Verbindungen

External connections

SIMADYN D SIMADYN D SIMADYN D

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-9

Edition 08.2005

1.1.11 Protective grounding

The protective ground is connected via the protective conductor (PE) at

the cabinets and components. For SIMADYN D, the potential bonding

conductor/cable does not have a protective conductor function. For

SIMADYN D it is required for reliable operation and noise suppression.

The protective conductor must be routed in accordance with DIN VDE

0100 and DIN VDE 0160.

For subracks, the protective conductor cross-section must be

≥ 6 mm2 and for cabinets, ≥ 10 mm2.

1.1.12 Radios

It is not permissible to use radios > 2W close to SIMADYN D.

For low-rating radios, a distance of > 1m must be maintained between

the radio and SIMADYN D.

1.1.13 Cabinet

• All SIMADYN D components must be mounted in a metal cabinet

• Each cabinet must have a ground/potential bonding rail, which is

connected to the cabinet frame at both ends.

• All SIMADYN D subracks must be connected to the

grounding/potential bonding rail through a 6 mm2 cable which should

be as short as possible. The connection via the PE connection of the

power supply is not sufficient.

• Non-damped contactors may not be used in a cabinet with SIMADYN

D components.

• If non-damped contactors are used in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,

then the cabinets must be separated by a metal partition.

• All of the cabinets associated with multi-motor SIMADYN D drives

must be connected through a potential bonding conductor with at least

a 16 mm 2 cross-section (the customers PE connection is not

sufficient).

• Each cabinet in which SIMADYN D components are installed/mounted

must have a screen rail. Serrated rails are suitable. The screen rail

must be connected directly to the cabinet frame.

• No gas discharge lamps may be used in the cabinet.

• The screens of incoming cables must be connected directly to the

screen rail.

• The cabinets must be designed so that air can circulate freely within

them.

General technical data

1-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1.14 Mounting clearances

The following minimum clearances must be maintained if SIMADYN D

subracks are mounted one on top of the other:

(For 2200 × 600 × 600 mm cabinets)

Front view Side view

Access level

> 50 mm > 50 mm > 50 mm

> 50 mm

Air intake

Discharged

air

Air deflection plate

Air intake

Discharged

air

min.120 mm

min. 75 mm

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-11

Edition 08.2005

1.1.15 Power loss in the cabinet

Different maximum temperature values are obtained for the SIMADYN D

components, depending on the installation type

• open rack

• cabinet with air mesh

• closed cabinet with forced convection

• closed cabinet with heat exchanger

>30mm

1) 2) 3) 4)

Frame / wall

Cabinet (open) with

forced ventilation,

air slots

> 600 cm

Cabinet (closed) with

self-convection and

forced air circulation

Closed cabinet

with heat exchanger

The power loss dissipated from a cabinet depends on the cabinet design,

its ambient temperature and the arrangement of the various devices in

the cabinet.

200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

55°C

Power loss

Ambient temperature

General technical data

1-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

Nominal values for permissible ambient temperatures of a cabinet with

the dimensions 600 mm × 600 mm ×2200 mm as a function of the

installed power loss can be taken from the figure above.

1. Open unit / wall

2. Cabinet with air slots

3. Closed cabinet with self-convection and forced air circulation using an

equipment fan

4. Closed cabinet with heat exchanger

If a cabinet is ventilated from below via the cable duct, more favorable

conditions are obtained as illustrated under 2).

For mounting types 1) and 2), it is assumed, that there is a minimum of

1m clearance between the cabinet and the ceiling.

1.1.16 Power supply

The following instructions to suppress noise in systems/plants must be

observed so that noise voltage spikes on the supply cable in the cabinet

are eliminated.

Suppressing supply cables

When the equipment is supplied from a 115/230 V supply, a line filter

must be installed in the cable as close as possible to where the cable

enters the cabinet (e. g. 250 V AC/ 10 A). The ground connection of the

line filter must be connected to the central grounding point in the cabinet

through the shortest possible path.

Discharge capacitors for DC supplies

If a cabinet is connected to a central 24 V supply, noise voltages can be

coupled-into the cabinet via the supply cable.

We recommend that noise suppression capacitors are installed where

the 24 V supply cable enters the cabinet. These capacitors can be

mounted on the cabinet ground or the screen rail.

If several 24 V power supplies are used in networked systems, then the

grounds of the power supplies must be connected with on another via the

grounding / potential bonding rail and connected to the subrack.

In order to diminish the effects of noise and disturbances, a line filter

should be provided for the 24V DC power supply of the digital inputs and

outputs ( e.g. line filter SIFI-B, Order No. B84112-B-.... from Epcos / line

filter NF 1-1 from Phönix Contact ). This should be located as close as

possible to the terminal block. The shield connection of the line filter must

be connected to ground through the shortest possible distance.

WARNING Protective separation in accordance with VDE 0160 must be

guaranteed for all power supply units which are used to supply

SIMADYN D units and modules.

Measures against

noise voltages

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-13

Edition 08.2005

Power supply potentials

For SIMADYN D, the grounds of all secondary voltages must be

connected together and connected to the subrack housing and grounded;

this enhances the discharge of noise signals and voltages.

230/115 V AC

24 V DC

Housing

+ 5 V

+ 15 V

- 15 V

Ground

Using clocked power supplies

If a clocked power supply is used for the 24V supply, the rated output of

the clocked power supply units must be designed for the inrush current of

SIMADYN D (the factor is 200 % of the rated current). Otherwise, the

clocked power supply can ramp-up along the short-circuit current limiting

and undefined conditions can occur.

1.1.17 Subracks

• The subracks must be connected to the grounding/potential bonding

rail using the shortest possible 6mm2 cable.

• All of the boards must be screwed into subracks. This is also required

during the commissioning phase!

• Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers.

• If modules are inserted in an adapter during the commissioning

phase, the front panel must be electrically connected to the housing

through the shortest possible path.

• Modules may neither be removed nor inserted under voltage.

• The connectors for serial interfaces must be screwed to the front

panel.

• The maximum temperature of the air drawn-in by the subrack is 55ºC.

The subrack must be mounted so that air can freely circulate. It must

be ensured that heat cannot build-up (no hotspots).

• The air drawn-in by the subrack must be as dust-free as possible.

General technical data

1-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.1.18 Cables

Cables from the outside (e. g. to the terminal modules) may not be routed

in a common cable duct with internal cables in the cabinet.

For incoming screened cables (analog and binary), the screen must be

connected to the screen rail where the cable enters the cabinet. The

cable must then be routed, still screened up to the terminal

module/module. Screens are not connected to terminal

modules/modules.

Serial connecting cables must be screened. The screen must be

connected to a metallized connector housing. Further, it must also be

connected to the screen rail. The cable screen may not be connected to

pin 1 of the connector.

Screening using just the front panels of the modules is not effective

The screen cables must be connected at both ends to the screen rails in

the cabinets.

All analog signal cables must be screened, both in the cabinet as well as

outside the cabinet.

Single-ended grounding of cable screens

For analog signal cables, which only conduct low signal levels

(mV or μA), the cable screen is connected to the cable rail at one side in

the cabinet.

All of the signal cables must be provided with screen.

Module Cable length, screened

Outputs 1000 m

Inputs, 230 V AC 1000 m

Inputs, 24...60 V DC 1000 m

Below 500 V AC, a minimum clearance of > 10 cm must be maintained

between signal cables and power cables; for power cables above 1 kV

AC, a clearance > 30 cm must be maintained.

1.1.19 Mounting SIMADYN D unit in drive converters

When mounting SIMADYN D modules in drive converters, the following

should be observed:

• The tachometer cables of the pulse encoders should have double

screens for lengths >10m.

• Only terminal modules and cables in the SIMADYN D program may

be used.

• All cable screens must be connected through the largest possible

surface area to the screen rail. The screen rail must be grounded

using the shortest possible 10mm2 cable.

Screening,

permissible cable

lengths

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-15

Edition 08.2005

• Avoid installing the drive converters close to radio transmitter

antennas

• The drive converters must always be mounted in enclosed metal

cabinets.

1.2 ESD guidelines

1.2.1 What is ESD?

Almost all of the SIMADYN D modules have highly-integrated devices.

These devices are, from their very nature, extremely sensitive to

overvoltage conditions, and therefore also to electrostatic discharge.

The abbreviation stands for electrostatic discharge

ATTENTION ACHTUNG

Observe Precautions

for Handling Nur geschultes Personal

darf die Verpackung öffnen

Electrostatic Sensitive

Devices (ESD)

Elektrostatisch gefährdete

Bauelemente (EGB)

ORIGINAL PACKING

Modules, which use these devices have the following warning label on

the component side:

Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltage- and energy

level which lie far below the perception levels of human beings.

Voltages such as these occur when personnel touch a component or a

module without having first being previously electrostatically discharged.

Components, which have been subject to such overvoltage conditions,

can generally not be immediately identified as being faulty, as this is only

manifested after a somewhat longer operating time.

1.2.2 Handling ESD modules

• As a general rule, electronic modules should only be touched if this is

absolutely necessary.

• Components may only be touched if the person

− is continuously grounded through an ESD bracelet, or

− is wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips.

ESD

General technical data

1-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

• Before touching an electronics module, you must electrically

discharge your body. This can be simply done by touching a

conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e. g. bare metal

cabinet parts, water pipe etc.)

• Modules may not come into contact with highly insulating materials

which can be statically charged. This includes plastic foils, insulating

desktops, clothing manufactured out of man-made fibers.

• Modules may only be placed down on conductive surfaces (desktop

with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam rubber, ESD packing bags,

ESD transport containers, cardboard- or paper surfaces).

• Modules may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or

television sets.

1.2.3 Measuring and making changes on ESD modules

• It only permissible to make measurements at the modules, if

− the measuring unit is grounded (e. g. via protective conductor) or

− before making measurements with an electrically-isolated

measuring device, the probe is briefly discharged (for example by

touching a bare metal control housing).

When carrying-out soldering work on modules, ESD soldering irons must

be used or at least the soldering iron tip grounded.

General technical data

Hardware - SIMADYN D 1-17

Edition 08.2005

1.2.4 Transporting modules

Modules and components may only be stored and transported in

conductive packing materials (e. g. metallized plastic boxes, metal

containers).

If the packaging is not conductive, then the modules must first be

wrapped in conductive packaging materials. This can include, for

example conductive foam rubber or normal household aluminum foil.

The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown in the

following diagram.

a = conductive flooring surface

d = ESD coat/jacket

b = ESD desk = ESD chain

c = ESD shoes

f = grounding connection for the cabinets

General technical data

1-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 08.2005

1.3 Ambient conditions

The following safety regulations must

be applied:

VDE 0160

Electric power equipment with

electronic devices

Data for „Protective separation“ of

115/230 V AC power supply parts with

respect to PELV circuits

Data for „Protective separation“ of 25V

AC/ 60V DC signal voltages with

respect to PELV circuits

VDE 0106 Part 1

Data regarding shock protection

Protective class according to VDE

0106 Part

I (with protective conductor) for

115/230V supply voltage

II (safety extra-low voltage) for 24V

supply („protective separation“)

Air intake temperature for self- or

forced cooling

It should be observed whether the

module is designed for natural air

cooling or forced ventilation

0 degrees C up to + 55 degrees C

Storage temperature -25 degrees C up to +70 degrees C

Mechanical specifications:

Testing in accordance with SN 29050

in operation Severity grade, class 12

during transport Severity grade, class 22

certification Manufacturers certification for EMC (in

accordance with the EC Directive)

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-1

Edition 04.2011

2 Subracks

2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V 2-2

2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24 2-13

2.3 Subrack SRT400 2-26

Overview

Subracks

2-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.1 Subracks SR6, SR6V

The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HD)

233.4  220 mm².

An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules

via the backplane bus (L bus) and permits data transfer between them.

SR6/SR6V: 6

The slots are identified by a labeling strip.

2.1.1 Power supply

The power supply (type SP7, 6DD1683-0BB0) plugs into the SIMADYN D

ES 902 C subrack system in the righthand subrack slot.

It is secured using a screw locking so that it cannot slide out and guarantees

natural air cooling (SR6) or unrestricted forced ventilation with mounted fan

(SR6V) of the subrack.

The current demand of the modules may not exceed the available output

currents of the 5 V and +/-15 V supplies (refer to the Chapter „Technical

data“). Otherwise, a larger subrack must be used, e. g. SR12.x.

 green LED green: Error-free operation

 red LED: Fault condition

 reset button to restart modules

 connection for the supply voltage (screw/plug-in terminal X1)

 connection for an external back-up battery (screw/plug-in terminal X2)

 test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V

(short-circuit protection is provided via protective resistors)

The 230 V supply voltage is fed-in via the 4-pole screw/plug-in terminal X1.

The connection assignment is printed on the front panel:

Connector X1, Pin Significance

1 L phase conductor

2 N neutral conductor

3 Not connected

4 PE protective conductor

Description

No. of slots

Power

Front panel

elements

Supply connection

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-3

Edition 04.2011

NOTES It must be a slightly a

e circuit breaker in the supply circuit.

The connector X1 is not permissible as a circuit breaker.

The connector X1 is permissible only for the internal wiring and may be

plugged only in the voltageless state or be split.

The connector X1 must not be used for a power cable removable of the

terminal user.

The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 4. It

is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor.

The following fuses are located on the power supply PC board

F 1: T800 mA H 250 V (supply)

F 2: T800 mA H 250 V (supply)

F: T50 mA H

NOTE Caution: bipolar fuse

An external fuse must be dimensioned according to the following operating

data: Input current (at 230 V): In = 600 mA

Fuse link: I²t = 0.5 A²s

Peak inrush current: Is = 25 A

NOTE The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT

systems.

2.1.2 Voltage monitoring functions

The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions.

Input voltage

(Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC)

Response

Undervoltage:

< 170 ...175 V

Green OK LED goes dark

The output voltages are shutdown;

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

The system automatically restarts when

the input voltage increases to approx.

190 V.

Overvoltage

> approx. 265 V

Red fault LED is lit;

The output voltages are shutdown,

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

No automatic restart (the line supply

voltage must be disconnected)

Fuses

Input voltage

Subracks

2-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition

(e. g. as a result of overload/short-circuit).

Undervoltages at the output Response

V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V

(for t>100-200 µs)

Red fault LED is lit

The output voltages are shutdown

(CPU stop)

No automatic restart (the line supply

voltage must be disconnected)

V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V

V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V

Red fault LED is lit

5V voltage remains

System failure message

The associated module („STOP“ tab) is configured in HWConfig under

„Object properties“ to define how the module behaves when a system failure

message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low):

 Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs

 CPU modules can go into the „STOP“ condition („H“)

2.1.3 Battery back-up

The SR6 subrack does not have its own back-up battery.

A back-up battery can be connected at the screw/plug-in terminal X2 to save

configured values (application software) during a power failure (using

function block SAV). The connection assignment is printed on the front

panel:

Connector X2, Pin Designation Comment

1 0 V Battery ground

2 BATAL Battery monitoring („alarm“ for logical 0)

3 Vcc + 3.0 ...4.5 V battery voltage

Current load: Approx. 10 µA depending on the particular CPU module

It is recommended that the battery is changed every year.

When using a Lithium battery, a series resistor of 39  must be provided to

prevent an inadmissibly high charging current when a fault condition

develops (5V of the power supply is applied to the battery via a defective

diode - which could be a potential explosion hazard).

The monitoring CPU module in SR6(V) does not initially identify when there

is no back-up battery or the back-up battery is discharged (no flashing „b“).

Output voltage

System failure

message

Battery connection

External battery

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-5

Edition 04.2011

The SE60 interface module (6DD1681-0GA0, information will be provided on

request) includes the battery and supplies a monitoring signal, which is

connected at X2, pin2 „BATAL“. This TTL signal outputs a „0“ when the

battery voltage falls below 3.0 V.

WARNING For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the

equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer

permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration.

DANGER  When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be

individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.

 There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We

can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.

 Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and

European legislation and regulations.

 The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder

before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.

2.1.4 Backplane bus

All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via a

parallel backplane bus (L bus).

The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the

token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module.

Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board

slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module).

If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant.

The jumpers must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU

module.

A jumper is required if a module is not located at that connector slot!

The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane

bus connector (96-pin socket connector).

All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped.

Battery voltage

monitoring

Daisy chain

jumpers

Subracks

2-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

X201 to X206 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C

Pin No. Row a Row b Row c

1 5V 5V 5V

2 AUX2 AB20 AB22

3 AUX1 AB21 AB23

7 4 +15V +15V +15V

5 AUX0 -15V -15V

6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI

7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ

8 Vcc AB12 AB0

9 *BATAL 0V AB1

10 *DSAD AB13 AB2

11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3

12 AB19 AB14 AB4

13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5

14 *RESET AB15 AB6

15 *BHE PLC2 AB7

16 *BRQ AB16 AB8

17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9

18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10

19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11

20 *IR0 AB18 DB0

21 *IR1 0V DB1

22 *IR2 DB11 DB2

23 *IR3 0V DB3

24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4

25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5

26 *WR DB13 DB6

27 *RD 0V DB7

28 CLK DB14 DB8

29 *CLK.M 0V DB9

30 *DEN DB15 DB10

31 *HWE RES SBR

32 DT/*R 0V SBT

2.1.5 Ventilation/cooling

The subrack SR6 is designed for natural air cooling.

The SR6V has a fan on the top panel to operate CPU modules which require

forced ventilation.

The fan has a connecting terminal for its 1-ph. 230 V AC supply voltage. The

fan is not monitored.

Signal assignment,

backplane

connector

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-7

Edition 04.2011

The subrack must be able to discharge hot air:

 The discharged air may not be restricted by mounted components

 When mounting equipment or other components, a minimum clearance

of 60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack

If the subrack is mounted in a cabinet, the cabinet must have air ventilation

slots. If the cabinet is enclosed, the subrack must be force-ventilated (an

SR6V must be used).

If two subracks are mounted one on top of the other, there must be a

minimum 120 mm clearance between the two subracks, whereby the upper

subrack must be separated from the lower subrack by an air deflection plate.

2.1.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity

 The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting

studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as

possible.

Potential bonding using the PE pin of line connector X1 is not sufficient!

 All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be

connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor

having a minimum cross-section of 16 mm².

 Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82,

SR83).

 All modules must be tightly screwed into the subrack.

 No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with

SIMADYN D.

 If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,

the cabinets must have a metal partition between them.

 The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power

supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.

 Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be

disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the

supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition!

 The screens of screened cables must be directly connected to the

grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still

screened.

NOTE

dditional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer

to the Section „General technical data“!

Discharged air

EMC

Subracks

2-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.1.7 Technical data

AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38

Input voltage Vin 230 V (+ 10% / - 15%)

Input frequency 47.5 ... 62.5 Hz

Non-periodic overvoltages according to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2

Voltage 460 V

Duration 1.3 ms

Recovery time, min 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Brief voltage dips according to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3

Voltage 0

Duration 5 ms

Recovery time, min 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V

Output current 1.5 to 7 A

Ripple < 50 mVpp

Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)

Base load 1.5 A

when a CPU module is inserted

Overvoltage protection with suppressor diode

to protect the modules

Stabilization time < 80 ms after Vin= 230 V;

<1 ms

after load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated

Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current 0 to 0.7 A

Ripple < 150 mVpp

Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module

which requires this voltage

Input voltages

Output voltages

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-9

Edition 04.2011

Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current 0 to 0.6 A

Ripple < 150 mVpp

Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module

which requires this voltage

Time to establish the output voltages Approx. 200 ms

after the power supply voltage has

been applied

SR6 dimensions in mm

(W x H x D)

225 x 320 x 280

Dimensions of the SP7 power supply

in mm (W x H x D)

45.72 x 233.4 x 220

Weight 4 kg

Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B according to VDE

0871

Ventilation SR6: Natural air cooling

SR6V: Fan on the top panel

Screw/plug-in terminal X1 Phönix,

type MSTB 2.5/4-ST/5,08,

cable cross-section 2.5mm²

Screw/plug-in terminal X2 Phönix,

type MSTB 2.5/3-ST/5,08,

cable cross-section 2.5mm²

General data

Subracks

2-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.1.8 Dimension drawings

Cable retention

L-Bus

S01 S02 S06

SIMADYN D

RESET

FAULT

0V +5V

+/- 15V

1 0V

2 BATAL

3 VCC

1 L

2 N

4 PE

SIEMENS

9,99 cm

Explanation: Subrack SR6

(front view)

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-11

Edition 04.2011

L bus

Subrack SR6 (side view)

Subracks

2-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-13

Edition 04.2011

2.2 Subracks SR12 and SR24

Subracks SR12.x and SR24.x are available for different supply voltages and

with or without fan.

Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply

type

SR12.1 6DD1682-0CC0 24 V DC yes SP22

SR12.2 6DD1682-0CD0 24 V DC no SP23

SR12.3 6DD1682-0BC3 115/230 V AC yes SP22.5

SR12.4 6DD1682-0BC4 115/230 V AC no SP23.5

SR24.1 6DD1682-0BC0 24 V DC yes SP8

SR24.2 6DD1682-0BE0 24 V DC no SP9

SR24.3 6DD1682-0CE3 115/230 V AC yes SP8.5

SR24.4 6DD1682-0CE4 115/230 V AC no SP9.5

The subracks accommodate SIMADYN D modules with the format (HT)

233.4  220 mm².

An integrated power supply provides the necessary voltages for the modules

via 2 backplane buses (L bus, C bus) and permits data transfer between

them.

SR12.x: 12

SR24.x: 24

The slots are identified by a labeling strip.

2.2.1 Power supply

The power supply plugs into the SIMADYN D rack.

The power supply has a line filter which limits the radio interference voltage

to limit value class A in accordance with VDE 0871.

 Green LED: Error-free operation

 Red LED: Fault condition

 Compartment for the back-up battery

 Supply voltage connection (screw/plug-in terminal X1)

 Connection for an external back-up battery via screw/plug-in terminal X3

(this is optional to a back-up battery which can be inserted in the subrack

itself)

 Reset (cold restart of the modules) by

 Depressing the reset button

 Jumpering pins 1 and 2 at connector X4

Order No.

Description

Number of slots

Line filter

Front panel

elements

Subracks

2-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

 Test sockets to check the 3 output voltages 5 V, +/-15 V

(short-circuit proof)

The line supply voltage is connected through the 3-pole screw/plug-in

terminal X1.

The connection assignment is printed on the front panel:

Above the voltage selector switch (Slide switch) can be switched to between

an input nominal voltage from 230 V and 115 V.

The in each case valid value becomes visible with transfer of the switch.

SR12.1 and SR12.2

SR24.1 and SR24.2

SR12.3 and SR12.4

SR24.3 and SR24.4

Input voltage 24 V DC 230 V AC (default setting of

voltage selector switch )

115 V AC (change over voltage

selector switch )

X1 Pin 1 +24 V Phase conductor L

X1 Pin 2 Ground (0 V) Neutral conductor N

X1 Pin 3 Protective ground conductor

Protective conductor PE

External fuse

(rating)

For SR12.x:

In = 16 A max..

I²t= 6 A²s

Is = 32 A

(inrush peak)

For SR24.x:

In = 32 A max..

I²t= 10 A²s

Is = 64 A

(inrush peak)

For SR12.x: (AC230V)

In = 1.2 A max..

I²t= 0.6 A²s

Is = 6 A

(inrush peak)

For SR24.x: (AC230V)

In = 2.7 A max..

I²t= 1 A²s

Is = 9 A

(inrush peak)

X2 pins 1 - 4 Monitoring the power supply and fan assembly (relay)

X3 pins 1 - 2 Feed for an external back-up battery

X4 pins 1 - 2 Reset: A reset is initiated by jumpering the contents (optional to

using the reset button)

The specified current In is the current that can occur at a maximum insertion

of the subrack. The power supplies are in part oversized, and have a higher

maximum input current (Chapter: Technical dates).

NOTES The protective conductor must be connected at connector X1, pin 3.

It is not sufficient to connect a protective conductor at the subrack.

It must be a slightly accessible circuit breaker in the supply circuit.

Interface modules with binary output function SB70, SB71 should be

powered-up approximately 200 ms before the modules are powered-up

to prevent power-on effects.

This is achieved by simultaneously powering-up the subrack power

supplies (this requires approximately 200 ms to establish the voltages)

and the interface modules.

Supply connection

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-15

Edition 04.2011

There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies:

Power supply Fuse Type Voltage rated value

SP22.5/SP23.5 F601 T4A H 250 V

SP8.5 F400 T8A H 250 V

NOTE The power supply PC boards are suitable for the connection to IT

systems.

2.2.2 Voltage monitoring functions

The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage conditions.

Input voltage Response

Undervoltage:

SRx.1/SRx.2: < 20 V

SRx.3/SRx.4: < 170 ...175 V

Green OK-LED goes dark

The output voltages are shutdown;

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

The system automatically restarts when

the input voltage increases to approx.

196 V.

Overvoltage

SRx.1/SRx.2: > 32 V

SRx.3/SRx.4: > approx. 265 V

Red fault LED is lit;

The output voltages are shutdown,

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

Automatic restart

All of the output voltages are monitored for an undervoltage condition (e.g.

as a result of overload/short-circuit)

Undervoltages at the output Response

V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V

(for t>100-200 µs)

Red fault LED is lit

The output voltages are shut down;

(CPU stop)

No automatic restart (the line supply

voltage must be disconnected)

V (+ 15 V) < approx. 14 V

V (- 15 V) > approx. -14 V

Red fault is lit

5V voltage remains

System failure message

The associated module (under the „STOP“ tab) is configured in HWConfig

under "object properties" to define how the module behaves when a system

failure message is output (bus signal *RDYIN=low):

 Modules can reset their binary and analog outputs

 CPU modules can go into the "stop" condition ("H")

Input voltage

Output voltage

System failure

message

Subracks

2-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.2.3 Battery back-up

A back-up battery can be installed in the power supply to save configured

values during a power failure (using function block SAV) (nominal voltage,

approx. 3.6 V).

Current load: approx. 10 µA depending on the particular CPU module

It is recommended that the battery is changed every year.

When removing the power supply (the defect, changing the fan) back-up is

no longer possible. If required, the back-up voltage must be provided

through the appropriate contact of the backplane connector.

Lithium battery 3,4 V, 5 Ah

Design C (Baby element)

The monitoring CPU module identifies if there is no back-up battery or if the

back-up battery is discharged (at slot 1; flashing "B").

The battery should be changed with the subrack powered-up to prevent data

loss. If a supply voltage is not available, then a voltage must be applied via

connector X3!

WARNING For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in the

equipment when it is transported unless the battery manufacturer

permits this expressly using an appropriate declaration.

DANGER  When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be

individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.

 There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We

can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.

 Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and

European legislation and regulations.

 The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder

before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.

Battery connection

Battery type

Battery voltage

monitoring

Battery change

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-17

Edition 04.2011

2.2.4 Backplane buses

All of the inserted modules receive their voltages and exchange data via 2

parallel backplane buses:

 L bus („local bus“, below)

 C bus („communications bus“, top)

The bus uses the daisy chain principle where a CPU module accepts the

token signal and then transfers it to the next CPU module.

Thus, a daisy chain jumper must be inserted in all backplane bus PC board

slots where there is no CPU module (or EPx signal processor module).

If another module is inserted, the jumper is unimportant.

The jumper must be correctly inserted up to the last (righthand) CPU

module.

A jumper is required if a module is not located at a connector.

The two pins to insert the jumpers are located to the right of the backplane

bus connector (96-pin socket connector).

All of the jumpers are inserted when the equipment is shipped.

Daisy chain-

jumpers

Subracks

2-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

X101 to X124 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (C bus)

X201 to X224 96-pole socket connector DIN 41612 Type C (L bus)

The L- and C buses are essentially assigned the same.

The signals with grey background are only available at the L bus.

Pin No. Row a Row b Row c

1 5V 5V 5V

2 AUX2 AB20 AB22

3 AUX1 AB21 AB23

4 +15V +15V +15V

5 AUX0 -15V -15V

6 *LOCK *CSPER *CSINI

7 5VEXT 5VEXT *RSERQ

8 Vcc AB12 AB0

9 *BATAL 0V AB1

10 *DSAD AB13 AB2

11 *DSAVE PLC0 AB3

12 AB19 AB14 AB4

13 *OUTDS PLC1 AB5

14 *RESET AB15 AB6

15 *BHE PLC2 AB7

16 *BRQ AB16 AB8

17 *BGIN PLC3 AB9

18 *BGOUT AB17 AB10

19 *BCLR PLC4 AB11

20 *IR0 AB18 DB0

21 *IR1 0V DB1

22 *IR2 DB11 DB2

23 *IR3 0V DB3

24 *RDYIN DB12 DB4

25 *RDY PRIVAT DB5

26 *WR DB13 DB6

27 *RD 0V DB7

28 CLK DB14 DB8

29 *CLK.M 0V DB9

30 *DEN DB15 DB10

31 *HWE RES SBR

32 DT/*R 0V SBT

Signal assignment,

backplane

connector

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-19

Edition 04.2011

2.2.5 Ventilation/cooling

The power supplies for SR12.1 and SR12.3 have 1 fan.

The power supplies for SR24.1 and SR24.3 have 3 fans.

The subracks do not have an air filter. If a filter is required, this must be

provided at the cabinet.

The fans are monitored by the power supply (fan speed). At power-up, the

monitoring is enabled with a time delay to ensure that the subrack reliably

runs-up.

If a fault condition develops, a message is output via a relay contact

(24 V, 100 mA) at connector X2, pins 3 and 4:

 Relay contact closed: Fault-free operation

 Relay contact open : Faulted operation;

or the subrack has no fan

WARNING The subrack may not be used if the fan has a fault, as reliable

operation of the boards cannot be guaranteed due to the danger of

excessive temperature rise.

It is recommended that the fan is changed after approximately 40,000

operating hours at a 50° C ambient temperature. The power supply must

be removed. The bottom panel is completely changed, together with the

fans.

The battery back-up is interrupted when the fan is changed (refer to the

appropriate section.

The cabinet must have cooling air slots if the subracks are not equipped with

fans.

2.2.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity

Bus PC board

Ground

Permanent

connection

24 V electrical isolation

Power supply SIMADYN D subrack

Fan monitoring

Fan change

Self-convection

Ground

connections

Subracks

2-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

 The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting

studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as

possible.

Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector X1 is not

sufficient!

 All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be

connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at

least 16 mm².

 Empty slots must be provided with SIMADYN D slot covers (SR81, SR82,

SR83).

 All modules must be screwed into the subrack.

 No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with

SIMADYN D.

 If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,

the cabinet must have a metal partition between them.

 The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power

supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.

 Before removing the power supply, the connecting cables must be

disconnected. The connecting cables must first be disconnected from the

supply so that they are in a no-voltage condition!

 The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the

grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still

screened.

NOTE Additional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer

to Section „General technical data“!

EMC

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-21

Edition 04.2011

2.2.7 Technical data

Supply voltages

24 V DC

SR12.1

SR12.2

DC 24 V

SR24.1

SR24.2

Input voltage range 20 ... 30 V 20 ... 30 V

Input current 16 A 32 A

Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2

Max. voltage 35 V

Duration 500 ms

Recovery time, min. 50 s

Events per hour -

Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3

Voltage 0 V

Duration 5 ms

Recovery time, min. 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Connecting voltages

AC 115/230 V

SR12.3

SR12.4

AC 115/230 V

SR24.3

Input voltage range + 10% / - 15% + 10% / - 15%

Input frequency 47.5-62.5 Hz 47.5-62.5 Hz

Input current 4 / 2 A 9 / 4 A

Aperiodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2

Max. voltage 460 V

Duration 1.3 ms

Recovery time at least 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Short-term voltage drops acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3

Voltage 0 V

Duration 10 ms

Recovery time at least 10 s

Events per hour -

Input voltages

DC-input

Input voltages

AC-input

Subracks

2-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V

Output current SR12: 0 to 26 A

SR24: 0 to 52 A

Ripple < 50 mVpp

Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)

Base load Guaranteed when a CPU module is

inserted

Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode,

to protect the modules

Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V;

<1 ms

after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated

Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current SR12: 0 to 3.3 A

SR24: 0 to 6.5 A

Ripple < 150 mVpp

Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module

which requires this voltage

Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current SR12: 0 to 3.0 A

SR24: 0 to 6.0 A

Ripple < 150 mVpp

Base load Guaranteed by an inserted module

which requires this voltage

SR12 SR24

Dimensions in mm

(W x H x D)

298.5 x 508.5 x 320 542 x 508.5 x 320

Weight 10.5 - 11 kg 16.2 - 17.3 kg

Radio interference suppression level Limit value class B acc. to

VDE 0871

Output voltages

General data

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-23

Edition 04.2011

2.2.8 Dimension drawings

SI EMENS

BATTERY

3,7V/5Ah

++ +

POWER

SUPPLY

FAN

SI MADYN D

1 21 2

230 V AC/ 24 V DC

Cable retention

Protective conductor/

potential bonding

C bus

L bus

S01 S02 S12

12 34

230 V

110 V

Explanation: Subrack SR12

(Front view)

Subracks

2-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

SI EMENS

BATTERY

3,7V/5Ah

++ +

POWER

SUPPLY

FAN

SI MADYN D

1 21 2

230 V AC/ 24 V DC

Cable retention

Protective conductor/potential bonding M5

C bus

L bus

S01 S02 S24

12 34

230 V

110 V

Explanation: Subrack SR24 (front view)

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-25

Edition 04.2011

Cable

duct

L bus

C bus

Power supply

Subracks SR12 and SR24

(

Section A-B

)

Subracks

2-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.3 Subrack SRT400

Order No. Supply voltage Fan Power supply type

6DD1682-0CG0 AC 115/230 V no Integrated

SRT400 is a compact subrack for open-loop and control tasks that have a

technological orientation.

It is comparable with the electronics box of the SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES. The following boards can be inserted in the SRT400.

 up to two T400 technology boards

 one T400 and one MASTERDRIVES communications board (e.g. CB1,

ADB, …)

In addition to the T400, no other SIMADYN D boards can be inserted in the

subrack. Using these components, for example, functions can be expanded

at a reasonable price and existing plants/systems modernized.

The drives can be controlled via analog or serial interfaces - such as

Profibus DP, USS or peer- to -peer.

2.3.1 Power supply

The power supply is a plug-in unit and is permanently located in the

righthand slot of the subrack. It is interlocked using screws so that it cannot

slide out. It is self-ventilated.

It cannot be separately ordered.

 Green LED: Error-free operation

 Connection for the line supply voltage

 24V supply for the digital (binary) outputs of the T400

 Voltage selector switch (115 V / 230 V)

The incoming line supply voltage 115V/230V is connected through a 3-pin

screw terminal.

The connection assignment is stamped on the front plate:

Line supply

connection

Significance

Protective conductor

L Phase conductor

N Neutral conductor

It is possible to toggle between rated input voltages of 230 V and 115 V

using the voltage selector switch (slide switch).

Order No.

Description

Number of slots

Front panel

elements

Supply connection

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-27

Edition 04.2011

The value that has been selected can be seen when the switch is set.

NOTE An isolating device that is easy to access must be provided in the

power circuit.

WARNING The protective conductor must be connected at the line supply

connector. It is not sufficient to connect the protective conductor at the

subrack itself.

There are following fuses on the printed circuit board of the power supplies:

F1: T800 mA H 250 V (line supply)

F2: T800 mA H 250 V (line supply)

NOTE Caution: Two-pole fuse

NOTE The power supply PC board is suitable for the connection to IT

systems.

2.3.2 Voltage monitoring functions

The input voltage is monitored for undervoltage conditions.

Input voltage

(Vrated = 1-ph. 230 V AC)

Response

Undervoltage: < 170 V The output voltages are shutdown;

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

After the power supply voltage has been

shutdown and the input voltage increases to

approx. 195 V, then the system automatically

restarts.

Input voltage

(Vrated = 1-ph. 115 V AC)

Response

Overvoltage < 95 V The output voltages are shutdown;

CPU stop (DSAVE signal)

After the power supply voltage has been

shutdown and the input voltage increases to

approx. 100 V, then the system automatically

restarts.

Undervoltages at the output Response

V (5 V) < 4.7 ... 4.85 V

(for t>100-200 µs)

Green OK-LED goes dark

The output voltages are shutdown

(CPU stop)

The system does not automatically restart (the

line supply voltage must be switched-out)

Fuses

Input voltage

Output voltage

Subracks

2-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

2.3.3 Battery back-up

The SRT400 subrack does not have a buffer (back-up) battery.

2.3.4 Backplane bus

The power supply for the boards and the data exchange is realized via the

backplane bus.

2.3.5 Ventilation/cooling

The SRT400 subrack is designed for natural air cooling.

The warm air discharged from the subrack must be able to be dissipated to

the surrounding environment:

 Other mounted components may not restrict the hot discharged air

 When mounting equipment or other components a minimum clearance of

60 mm must be maintained above and below the subrack

If the subrack is mounted in an electrical cabinet, then the cabinet cooling

must be ensured using ventilation slots.

If two subracks are located one above the other then a minimum clearance

of 120 mm must be maintained between the two subracks; an air deflection

plate must be provided so that the hot discharged air of the lower subrack

does not pass through to the second subrack.

2.3.6 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity

 The subrack must be connected to the grounding rail via the connecting

studs through a min. 6 mm² cable which should be kept as short as

possible.

Potential bonding using the PE pin of supply connector is not sufficient!

 All of the cabinets associated with networked SIMADYN D drives must be

connected with one another through a potential bonding conductor of at

least 16 mm².

 All modules must be screwed into the subrack.

 No undamped contactors may be used in a cabinet together with

SIMADYN D.

 If undamped contactors are mounted in a cabinet next to SIMADYN D,

the cabinet must have a metal partition between them.

 The protective contactor is connected at the subrack and at the power

supply. Both components must be at protective conductor potential.

Discharged air

EMC

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-29

Edition 04.2011

 The screens of screen cables must be directly connected to the

grounding- or screen rails and fed to the interface modules, still

screened.

NOTE

dditional information regarding EMC and the ambient conditions, refer

to Section „General technical data“!

2.3.7 Technical data

AC power supply according to DIN IEC 38

Supply voltages

(can be set using the voltage selector switch)

AC 115 V AC 230 V

Input voltage range ±10% ±10%

Input frequency 47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz

Input current 0.8 A 0.4 A

Non-periodic overvoltages acc. to DIN VDE160, A5.3.1.1.2

Voltage 460 V

Duration 1.3 ms

Recovery time, min 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Brief voltage dips acc. to DIN VDE 0160, A5.3.1.1.3

Voltage 0 V

Duration 5 ms

Recovery time, min 0.1 s

Events per hour max. 10

Output voltage 5 V +5.1 V +/- 0.1 V

Output current 3 A

Ripple < 50 mVss

Commutating spikes < 5% (of 5V)

Overvoltage protection With suppressor diode,

to protect the modules

Stabilization time < 80 ms after Uin= 230 V;

<1 ms

after a load step (0.5 ->1)*Irated

Output voltage +15 V +15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current 0 to 0.5 A

Ripple < 150 mVss

Input voltages

Output voltages

Subracks

2-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

Output voltage -15 V -15 V +/- 0.3 V

Output current 0 to 0.2 A

Ripple < 150 mVss

Output voltage +24 V +24 V ( 20-30 V)

Output current 0 to 0.6 A

Time that it takes for the output

voltages to establish themselves

Approx. 200 ms after the power

supply voltage has been applied

Dimensions in mm

(W x H x D)

90.5 x 291 x 168.5

Weight 2 kg

Radio interference suppression

level

Limit value class B acc. to

VDE 0871

Ventilation Natural air cooling

Line supply connection

Screw/plug-in terminal 3 pin

Phönix,

type Front 2,5H

cable cross-section max. 2,5mm²

24V output terminal

Screw/plug-in terminal 2 pin

Phönix,

type Front 2,5H

cable cross-section max. 2,5mm²

General data

Subracks

Hardware - SIMADYN D 2-31

Edition 04.2011

Dimension drawing

Subracks

2-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-1

Edition 03.2001

3 CPU module

3.1 CPU module PM5 3-2

3.2 CPU module PM6 3-11

3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x 3-17

Overview

CPU module

3-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

3.1 CPU module PM5

6DD1600-0AJ0

The CPU module processes general open- and closed-loop tasks. In

addition to

• max. 8 binary inputs,

it also has the possibility to connect up to

• 2 absolute value encoders

• 2 incremental encoders.

Computational performance: 32 MHz, 32 bit RISC processor

DRAM 4 Mbytes (EDO)

SRAM 64 Kbytes

This CPU module permits fast cycle times of 0.1 ms.

A typical application (e. g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.6 ms.

The DRAM contains:

• program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is

initialized)

• data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer,

trace function

If the DRAM is not large enough for complex applications, a PM6 (with

8Mbyte DRAM) must be used.

The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external

battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a

power failure:

• operating system error diagnostics („exception buffer“)

• max. 1000 process quantities configured with function block SAV

• data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function

(can be optionally configured on the SRAM)

The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using

STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program

memory module (or MS51).

The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided

on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in 2 ways:

• via an PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter (offline

loading)

• directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the

memory module inserted in the CPU module

(online loading)

Order No.

Description

Performance data

DRAM

SRAM, buffered

Programming

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-3

Edition 03.2001

The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to

approx. 50%) and the size of the available program memory is displayed in

CFC under the following menu item:

Target system \ Load \ Info

The program is loaded in a program memory module

MS5, 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM

MS51, 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM

A MS51 memory module which could be used with the PM5 may only be

used up to approx. 50 % so that the expanded code can be accepted on the

PM5.

An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST1 with 19.2 kbd is

permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to:

• test and commission the user program

(using CFC or "IBS")

• loading the user program from the PC (only in this module)

The connections available at the 10-pin connector X5 (8 signals and

ground) are functionally sub-divided into 2 groups, each with 4 inputs:

Pins Function

1...4 Bin. input 1...4 Absolute value

encoder 1

Incremental encoder 1

5...8 Bin. input 5...8 Absolute value

encoder 2

Incremental encoder 2

A plug-in socket is provided on the PM5 for each of the 6 functions. A

function is not selected by configuring, but by inserting a coded connector

into the associated socket.

The available connections can therefore be used for one of the following

combinations of functions:

• 8 binary inputs or

• 4 binary inputs and 1 absolute value encoder or

• 4 binary inputs and 1 incremental encoder or

• 1 absolute value encoder and 1 incremental encoder or

• 2 absolute value encoders or

• 2 incremental encoders

Program size

MS5, MS51

Serial service

interface

Inputs

Selection

CPU module

3-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Fig. 3-1 Slots for coding connectors to select the functions for connector X5

(in this case, an absolute value encoder 1 and incremental encoder 2 have been

selected)

NOTE Only one coding connector may be inserted in each socket row (pins

1..4 or pins 5..8). A connection can only be assigned one function.

Uni-polar 15V encoders (HTL) with 2 tracks, displaced through 90°, A, B and

if required zero pulse, can be connected for closed-loop speed- or position

controls.

Encoders with SSI- or EnDat protocol can be connected for positioning

tasks.

The screw terminals for the connections are provided via interface modules

(can be connected using cable SC7):

Interface module Function

SB10

SU10

If at least 1 encoder connection is used (electrical 1:1

connection)

SB60

SB61

Optionally to SB10/SU10, if only binary inputs are used

(with electrical isolation and signal conversion)

Table 3-1 Possible interface modules for PM5

Bin.In1..4 Absolut.1 Increm.1

Bin.In5..8 Absolut.2 Increm.2

Function

Pins 1...4

select one

Function

only!

Function

Pins 5...8

select one

Function

only!

Incremental

encoders

Absolute value

encoder SSI, EnDat

Interface modules

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-5

Edition 03.2001

In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is

displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the

error type.

Possible operating- and error statuses:

Display

Operating- and error statuses

Display

can be

deleted

with key

1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal

operation

A User error:

with function block USF from the diagnostics event

defined by the user. This has no influence on the

program run.

yes

- Initialization phase

individual initialization steps are displayed with

increasing numbers during the run-up phase

. 5V available; no program is being executed -

0 Error during initialization:

the user program does not start if errors occur when

the system is being initialized.

Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly

inserted modules for the actual software which has

been configured:

• flashing „0“: Error on this module

• steady „0“: Error on other modules

• continuous: Error when loading the system

software

Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first

displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify

which CPU module was the first to have displayed the

error message, then you should start with that CPU

module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to

the left.

b Monitoring error

• e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery

• background processing error

• when initializing non-critical error which permits

standard operation to start

yes

C Communications error

erroneous configured communications or connection

d • steady "d":

Module is in the STOP mode;

selection in the „Target system/operating mode“

menu;

software is still not being downloaded

• flashing "d":

Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode

is faster than download in the RUN mode

(runs in the background)

7-segment display

CPU module

3-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Display

Operating- and error statuses

Display

can be

deleted

with key

E Task administrator error:

• cycle error

a task was not able to be processed within the

sampling time

• task backup

if the task is not designated as a high-priority task,

and has to be re-started.

• no free local buffer

the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is

skipped.

• software watchdog

if the base sampling time is not processed for four

consecutive times. The basic clock timer is re-

initialized with the configured base sampling time

and processing is continued.

yes

H Fatal system error:

hardware or software problem which cause a program

crash:

Display:

• flashing „H“: Fault/error on this module

• steady „H“: Fault/error on another module

Additional information

on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for

D7-SYS".

The button has 2 functions:

• Deleting the error display:

By depressing button S1, sporadic errors („E“) or non-critical errors („b“)

appearing in the display can be deleted.

If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been

acknowledged.

• Binary signal input with function block ASI

Resolution, 0.1 ms;

e. g. to time stamp messages

A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module

(ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected

(„Hardlock PAL“).

Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and

program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect.

Additional information on request.

Button S1

Real-time clock

Software

protection

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-7

Edition 03.2001

3.1.1 Supplementary components

• MS5 and MS51 program memory modules

• cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m

• cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m

If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these

can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules; the

types are subsequently listed:

• IT41

• IT42

• ITDC

• ITSL

3.1.2 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

• do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up

For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the

Section „General technical data“

3.1.3 Connector assignments

Pin Designation Comment

2 RxD Receive data

3 TxD Transmit data

5 M Ground

7 RTS Request to send („1“)

Table 3-2 Connector assignment X01

Pin As binary input As absolute value

encoder

(SSI or EnDat)

As incremental encoder

(15V)

1 Binary input 1 SSI1: Data + Encoder 1: Track A

2 Binary input 2 SSI1: Data - Encoder 1: Track B

Other information

Serial interface X01

RS 232

Binary- and

encoder inputs X5

CPU module

3-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Pin As binary input As absolute value

encoder

(SSI or EnDat)

As incremental encoder

(15V)

3 Binary input 3 SSI1: Clock + Encoder 1: Zero pulse

4 Binary input 4 SSI1: Clock - -

5 Binary input 5 SSI2: Data + Encoder 2: Track A

6 Binary input 6 SSI2: Data - Encoder 2: Track B

7 Binary input 7 SSI2: Clock + Encoder 2: Zero pulse

8 Binary input 8 SSI2: Clock - -

9 + 15 V Encoder power

supply

10 Ground

Table 3-3 Connector assignment X5

3.1.4 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.7 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typical current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1200 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 35 mA + encoder load

(max. 100 mA, electronic. limited)

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 35 mA

24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents

No. Depending on the selection via coding plug:

0 no coding plug at sockets X5A...

4 coding plug at 1 socket X5A...

8 2 coding plugs at both sockets X5A...

of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable

Input voltage +24 V rated voltage

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

for 0 signal 0 mA

for 1 signal 3 mA typ.

Input delay Max. 20 µs

Electrical isolation No;

only via SB60, SB61 interface modules

General data

Power supply

Binary inputs

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-9

Edition 03.2001

3.1.5 Connector assignments

Pin Designation Comment

2 RxD Receive data

3 TxD Transmit data

5 M Ground

7 RTS Request to Send („1“)

Table 3-4 Connector assignment X01

Pin As binary input As absolute value

encoder

(SSI oder EnDat)

As incremental

encoder (15V)

1 binary input 1 Encoder1: Data + Encoder1: Track A

2 binary input 2 Encoder1: Data - Encoder1: Track B

3 binary input 3 Encoder1: Clock + Encoder1: Zero pulse

4 binary input 4 Encoder1: Clock - -

5 binary input 5 Encoder2: Data + Encoder2: Track A

6 binary input 6 Encoder2: Data - Encoder2: Track B

7 binary input 7 Encoder2: Clock + Encoder2: Zero pulse

8 binary input 8 Encoder2: Clock - -

9 + 15 V Encoder power

supply (100 mA current

limited)

10 Ground

Table 3-5 Connector assignment X5

SSI-Protokoll EnDat-Protokoll

Pegel RS 485 RS 485

max. frequence 2 MHz 2 MHz

Data direction unidirectional bidireCtional

Data bits 13 + Parity

25 + Parity

variabel (max. 33)

Codierung Gray

Binär

Gray

Binär

Table 3-6 Specification absolute value encoder

Serial interface X01

RS 232

Binary- and

encoder inputs X5

Specification

absolute value

encoder

CPU module

3-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

3.1.6 Connection diagram

X01

PM5

8 binary inputs BI,

of which 4 are

interrupt-capable

SC57

9pin

10pin

l=5m

( cable 1)

COM1/2

Oper. control

unit

(PC)

SC7

l=2m

each 9 core

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

8 inputs

(each, 10 core)

Serial

interface

(service)

bus

2 incremental encoders

2 abs. value encoders

Optional

Fig. 3-2 Connecting cables and interface modules

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-11

Edition 03.2001

3.2 CPU module PM6

6DD1600-0AK0

The CPU module processes open- and closed-loop tasks which demand an

extremely high computational performance, or where the program is very

large. They have

• 8 binary inputs,

of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt tasks.

Computational performance: 64/128 MHz, 32/64 bit RISC processor

DRAM 8 MByte (SD), version with 16Mbyte

SRAM 256 KByte

The CPU module permits extremely fast cycle times of 0.1 ms. A typical

application (e.g. control loop) can be configured in approx. 0.5 ms.

The DRAM contains:

• Program code (is loaded and expanded when the memory module is

initialized)

• Data memory for the operating system, communications, message buffer,

trace function

The buffered SRAM (using either a battery in the subrack or an external

battery) contains the following data, which are to be saved during and after a

power failure:

• Operating system error diagnostics ("exception buffer)

• Max. 1000 process quantities, configured with the function block SAV

• Data recorded/traced using the message system or trace function

(can be optionally configured on the SRAM)

The program, running on the CPU module, is configured on a PC using

STEP7/HWConfig and CFC. This is then loaded into an MS5 program

memory module (or MS51).

The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle provided

on the CPU module. The user program can be loaded in two ways:

• via a PCMCIA card installed in the PC-programming adapter

(offline loading)

• directly from the PC via a serial communications connection in the

memory module inserted in the CPU module

(online loading)

The size of the software to be loaded in the memory module (compressed to

approx. 50% and the size of the available program memory is displayed in

CFC under the following menu item:

Target system \ Load \ Info

Order No.

Description

Performance data

DRAM

SRAM, buffered

Programming

Program size

CPU module

3-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

The program is loaded in a program memory module

• MS5 2 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM

• MS51 4 Mbyte Flash-EPROM, 8 Kbyte EEPROM

• MS52 8 MByte Flash-EPROM, 8 KByte EEPROM

An RS 232 interface (V.24) with service protocol DUST 1 with 19.2 kbaud is

permanently installed in connector X01 (9-pin sub-D socket). It is used to:

• test and commission the user program (using CFC or "basic IBS")

• loading the user program from the PC (only in this module)

8 binary inputs can be connected at the 10-pin connector X5.

The screw terminals for the binary inputs are available via the interface

modules (can be connected using cable SC7):

Interface module Function

SB10, SU10 Electrical 1:1 connection

SB60, SB61 With electrical isolation (floating) and signal conversion

Table 3-7 Possible interface modules for PM6

MS5, MS51, MS52

Serial service

interface

Binary inputs

Interface modules

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-13

Edition 03.2001

In normal operation, the configured number of the CPU module (1...8) is

displayed. When an error occurs, a letter is displayed, which refers to the

error type. Possible operating- and error statuses:

Display

Operating- and error statuses

Display

can be

deleted

with key

1...8 Configured number of the CPU module in normal

operation

A User error:

with function block USF from the diagnostics event

defined by the user. This has no influence on the

program run

yes

- Initialization phase

Individual initialization steps are displayed with

increasing numbers during the run-up phase

. 5V available; no program is being executed -

0 Error during initialization:

the user program does not start if errors occur when

the system is being initialized.

Initialization error due to erroneous or incorrectly

inserted modules for the actual software which has

been configured:

• flashing „0“: Error on this module

• steady „0“: Error on other modules

• continuous: Error when loading the system

software

Start diagnostics at the CPU module, which first

displayed the "0" error message. If you cannot identify

which CPU module was the first to have displayed the

error message, then you should start with that CPU

module which displays a "0" and is inserted farthest to

the left.

b Monitoring error

• e.g. missing, discharged buffer battery

• background processing error

• when initializing non-critical error which permits

standard operation to start

yes

C Erroneous configured communications or connection no

d • steady "d":

Module is in the STOP mode;

selection in the „Target system/operating status“

menu;

software is still not being downloaded

• flashing "d":

Data is being downloaded in the STOP mode

is faster than download in the RUN mode (runs in

the background)

E Task administrator error:

• cycle error

a task was not able to be processed within the

yes

7-segment display

CPU module

3-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Display

Operating- and error statuses

Display

can be

deleted

with key

sampling time

• task backup

if the task is not designated as a high-priority task,

and has to be re-started.

• no free local buffer

the data buffer is no longer enabled. Task start is

skipped.

software watchdog

if the base sampling time is not processed for four

consecutive times. The basic clock timer is re-

initialized with the configured base sampling time and

processing is continued.

H Fatal system error:

hardware or software problem which caused a program

crash:

Display:

• flashing „H“: Fault/error on this module

• steady „H“: Fault/error on another module

Additional information

on diagnostics refer to the Manual "SIMADYN D Basis Software for

D7-SYS

The button has 2 functions:

• Deleting the error display:

By depressing button S1, sporadic errors ("E") or non-critical errors ("B")

appearing in the display can be deleted.

If another error is present, this is displayed after the first has been

acknowledged.

• Binary signal input with function block ASI

Resolution 0.1 ms; e.g. to time stamp messages;

An MM3 coupling memory module must be used as time source if the time is

to be backed-up during power failures.

A plug-in socket for a 28-pin EPLD device is provided on the module

(ALTERA company) so that the user program can be copy-protected

(„Hardlock-PAL“).

Using a special function block, this EPLD device can be checked and the

program stopped if the code is missing or is incorrect.

Additional information on request.

Button S1

Real-time clock

Software

protection

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-15

Edition 03.2001

3.2.1 Supplementary components

• MS5 and MS51 program memory modules

• Cable SC57 for PC connection, 9-core, 5 m

• Cable SC7 to connect an interface module, 10-core, 2 m

If additional input/output signals and other functions are required, then these

can be implemented by inserting a maximum of 2 expansion modules:

• IT41

• IT42

• ITDC

• ITSL

3.2.2 Application information and noise immunity

• Operation without fan is not possible

• Noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

• Do not insert or withdraw the module when the subrack is powered-up

For more information regarding EMC and ambient conditions, refer to the

section "General technical data“!

3.2.3 Technical data

Number of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight approx. 0.51 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typical current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1700 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 50 mA

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 30 mA

24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents

Other information

General data

Power supply

CPU module

3-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

No. 8

of which, max. 4 are interrupt-capable

Input voltage +24 V rated voltage

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or binary inputs open-circuit

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

for 0 signal 0 mA

for 1 signal 3 mA typ.

Input delay max. 20 µs

Electrical isolation no;

only via SB60, SB61 interface modules

3.2.4 Connection diagram

X01

PM6

8 binary inputs BI,

of which 4 are

interrupt-capable

9 pin

10pin

X5 SC7

l=2m SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

8 BI

(each, 10 core.)

Serial

interface

(service)

bus

SC57

l=5m

( Cable 1)

COM1/2

Oper. control

unit

(PC)

each 9 core

(Binary inputs)

Fig. 3-3 Connecting cables and interface modules

Binary inputs

CPU module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 3-17

Edition 03.2001

3.3 Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x

6DD1645-0AE0

The EP3 module is used for special applications. Especially for fast closed-

loop control and arithmetic operations involving converter-related functions

including the gating unit and fast analog signal processing (digital filter).

The EP3 has a DSP56002 signal processor.

The module is configured in HWConfig (the board is inserted in the

SIMADYN D station).

It includes interfaces to plug-in technology cards IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3, which

can optimally adapt the peripheral hardware to the particular task.

They are also configured in HWConfig

(the module is inserted in the SIMADYN D station).

NOTE You will find a detailed description and technical data on EP3 in the

following documentation

"Hardware description large drives"

Order No.: 6DD2921-0XH10.

Order No.

Description

IS_1, IS_2 and IS_3

CPU module

3-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-1

Edition 03.2001

4 Coupling memory module

4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4 4-2

Overview

Coupling memory module

4-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

4.1 Coupling memory modules MM11, MM3, MM4

MM11: 6DD1611-0AD0

MM3: 6DD1611-0AF0

MM4: 6DD1611-0AG0

A coupling memory module has a data memory (RAM), which is used to

transfer data via the CPU modules. A coupling memory module must always

be used if there is more than one CPU module in a subrack, and if the CPU

modules wish to transfer data within the module. For instance, using

configured „$ connections“, „coupling memory module coupling“ or if several

CPU modules access a CS7 serial interface.

A coupling memory module can be inserted at any slot between the first and

second CPU module.

1st CPU

module

Coupling

memory

module

2nd CPU

module

nth CPU

module

Bus system

MM11 MM3 MM4

Bus connection L bus,

C bus

L bus,

C bus

L bus,

C bus

Memory size 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 64 Kbytes 2 * 2 Mbytes

Other functions • System error-

relay;

• Radio clock

System error-relay;

• Data is buffered against power failure using a back-up battery (3.4 V) in

the subrack

• Integrated bus termination for the C bus and L bus

Order No.

Application

Slot

Features

Coupling memory module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-3

Edition 03.2001

4.1.1 Real-time clock in the MM3 coupling memory module

The MM3 coupling memory module includes, in addition to the buffer

function, also a real-time clock, which can be set and synchronized via a

• DCF-77 radio signal

An additional dual port RAM connected to the L bus provides the clock time

to other functions in the CPU modules (e. g. message system). To realize

this, the MM3 must be configured as real-time source on the 1st CPU

module with function block RTCM.

The clock time (time of day) is buffered by the subrack back-up battery.

An MM3 can be inserted, together with an MM4 in a SIMADYN D subrack

to use the large MM4 memory, and to utilize the buffered real-time clock of

the MM3. In this case, the MM3 can be inserted at any subrack slot. The

MM3 memory is not used.

• 10-digit, 7-segment displays H1 - H10 for

seconds, minutes, hours, months, days

located under one another in pairs

(from top to bottom)

• 2 keys to manually set the clock

• 4 LEDs for status displays

• Screw/plug-in terminal (X5) for system error signal relay:

When a CPU module identifies a fatal error, normal operation is aborted;

the subrack goes into the STOP condition,

the relay opens when an error occurs

• Screw/plug-in terminal (X6) is prepared for IRIG-B audio signal;

this functionality has still not been implemented!

• BNC socket (X7) for DCF-77 antenna connection

• 1 double test socket for the reset signal (X10/X11) to reset the module

(caution: This must only be used for test purposes!)

Data back-up

MM3 + MM4

Front panel

elements

Coupling memory module

4-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Communi-

cations

buffer L bus

32K X 16

80C186

dual-port

RAM

2K X 8

32K X 16

RDYIN-

relay

Input Output Status-

Data- control- and address bus

Time

CPU

7-segment

LED control Coupling memory

module C bus

Clock module

DCF77 receiver

and

IRIG-B converter L bus

C bus

RDYIN

IRIG-B

Fig. 4-1 MM3 block diagram

Note: Led H1 (seconds) is located at the top, H10 (days) at the bottom!

The time is synchronized (time of day setting) via antenna using the DCF-77

radio signal. This signal can be received in Central Europe.

A differentiation is made between the following antennas:

• antenna for inside installation

• antenna for outside installation

The antenna must be aligned so that optimum reception is guaranteed.

Generally, this is towards Frankfurt/Main, where the signal transmitter is

located. The BNC socket X7 at the front panel is used to connect the

antenna.

Radio clock

DCF-77

Coupling memory module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-5

Edition 03.2001

NOTE The antenna for outdoor installation normally ensures better

reception, as the rooms, in which SIMADYN D is used, are generally

screened and/or can accommodate devices/equipment which emit

noise radiation.

If the time display flashes, then the time hasn’t been set after power-up

(voltage on).

The clock can be set in 3 different ways:

• using the DCF-77 radio signal:

The clock is set using the antenna signal when the appropriate data is

configured at the IS input of function block RTCM, an antenna is

connected and the reception conditions are OK (refer below).

The complete time of day is received after approximately 2 minutes as a

result of the telegram data transfer time of the DCF-77. The clock display

flashes for this time after power-up.

• when the signal at input IS changes from 0 to 1 at function block RTCM,

the time of day, available at its connections, is transferred.

• the time of day can always be manually set using two keys:

− using upper key S1, all numerical pairs (digit pairs) of the 7-segment

display are selected one after the other. They flash after they have

been selected.

− using lower key S2, a „1“ is added to the value in the flashing display,

each time the key is depressed. When seconds is selected the value

is set to zero.

− after the seconds display has been selected, the next time that S1 is

depressed, the year is displayed on the two upper digit pairs (H1, H2)

- the year - can be set.

− after all of the digit pairs have been selected, the next time that S1 is

depressed, the setting mode is exited. The display stops flashing.

Time displayRadio

clock DCF-77:Time

display

Setting the clock

time

Coupling memory module

4-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

LEDs H20 to H23 are loaded on the front panel. They indicate the status of

the clock receiver (time of day receiver).

LED Color Function Description

H20 Green Lit The module has been

initialized to receive

the DCF77 signal

Dark The module has been

initialized to receive

the IRIG-B signal

H21 Red Flashes in a

second rhythm

The time signal is

received

Lit The signal does not

contain information -

check the signal cable!

H22 Green Dark The time signal

contains incorrect

information

Lit The information is

received for at least 10

seconds in the correct

format

H23 Red Lit Time telegram error

Dark Decoding running

Order designation Supplier

FG443610 antenna for indoor

installation 4436

(long distance)

Hopf Elektronik

Nottebohmstr. 41

58511 Lüdenscheid

FG441800 antenna for outdoor

installation 4418

Receive status

Ordering data,

radio clock

antenna

Coupling memory module

Hardware - SIMADYN D 4-7

Edition 03.2001

4.1.2 Technical data MM11, MM3, MM4

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight MM11: Approx. 0.51 kg

MM3: 0.7 kg

MM4: 0.5 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V MM11: 300 mA

MM3: 600 mA

MM4: 800 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V MM3: 50 mA

Back-up battery 2.2 V 3.9 V 20 µA

RDYIN signal output for MM3 and MM4:

Description Values

Voltage max. 60 V DC

Switching current max. 0,5 A

NC contact interrupt time 100 ms

Switching power max. 20 W

General data

Power supply

voltage

System error

relay

Coupling memory module

4-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-1

Edition 12.2004

5 Input/output modules

5.1 Input/output modules EA12 5-2

5.2 Input/output module EB11 5-7

5.3 Expansion module IT41 5-16

5.4 Expansion module IT42 5-33

5.5 Converter control ITDC 5-45

Overview

Input/output modules

5-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.1 Input/output modules EA12

6DD1642-0BC0

• 8 analog outputs

• 20-pin connector for the analog outputs

• 8 test socket pairs (2.3 mm) on the front panel to connect measuring

equipment (for start-up)

• L bus connection

An analog output (signal at the connector and interface module and at the

test socket) can be loaded up to 10 mA and is short-circuit proof for 2 min.

The manufacturer adjusts the outputs as far as offset and gain are

concerned for an ambient temperature of approximately 20° C:

This adjustment is made using 2 potentiometers for each output, which are

not sealed so that they can be re-adjusted in operation (e. g. due to different

ambient temperatures).

The temperature dependency is max. approx. +/-240 µV at a temperature

change of +/-1° C.

Analog output Offset Gain

Output 1 -R49 -R46

Output 2 -R55 -R52

Output 3 -R61 -R58

Output 4 -R67 -R64

Output 5 -R73 -R70

Output 6 -R79 -R76

Output 7 -R85 -R82

Output 8 -R91 -R88

Table 5-1 Adjustment potentiometers for analog outputs

The module should be operated for approx. 2 min before any adjustment is

made so that it has time to reach its operating temperature.

The offset adjustment is first made. The value 0.0 (0%) should be output in

the configured software at the connection of the associated function block,

and the associated offset potentiometer should be adjusted until 0 V is

measured.

The output voltage is increased by rotating the potentiometer clockwise.

The gain is then adjusted. The associated analog output should be driven

with 2.0 (200%) (configured software) and the associated offset

potentiometer should be adjusted until 10 V is measured.

The switch-mode power supply causes voltage spikes (these can be

measured up to 100 mV) on the ground cable. They can be suppressed by:

• smoothing at the load input

• low-ohmic load

5.1.1 Supplementary components

All of the cables for the output signals are not directly connected at the

module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as

mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and toelectrically

adapt the system/plant signals (optional).

Order No.

Features

Load capability

Adjustment,

temperature

Adjustment

Noise signals at

the outputs

Interface modules

with terminals

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-3

Edition 12.2004

Interface

module

Function

SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion

Table 5-2 Interface modules which can be connected at the module

• The module is connected to the interface modules using matching plug-in

cables:

• SC12 to connect an SU11

Cables

Input/output modules

5-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.1.2 Connector assignment X5

EA12

Significance Associated

test socket

SU11

Connector

designation when

configuring

1 Analog output 1 X11 SIG 1 X5A

2 Ground X11 COM 2

3 Analog output 2 X12 SIG 3 X5B

4 Ground X12 COM 4

5 Analog output 3 X13 SIG 5 X5C

6 Ground X13 COM 6

7 Analog output 4 X14 SIG 7 X5D

8 Ground X14 COM 8

9 Analog output 5 X15 SIG 9 X5E

10 Ground X15 COM 10

11 Analog output 6 X16 SIG 11 X5F

12 Ground X16 COM 12

13 Analog output 7 X17 SIG 13 X5G

14 Ground X17 COM 14

15 Analog output 8 X18 SIG 15 X5H

16 Ground X18 COM 16

17 Electronics ground

(connected with the

electronics ground via 0

Ohm resistor)

--- 17

18 Electronics ground

(connected with the

electronics ground via 0

Ohm resistor)

--- 18

19 Ground --- 19

20 Ground --- 20

Table 5-3 EA12 connector- and SU11 terminal assignment

All of the "ground" terminals are connected together via 0 Ohm resistors

and are connected to electronics ground via an associated inductance.

5.1.3 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

The input/output signals must be screened on the plant/system side. The

screen must be connected through the largest possible surface area to the

screen rail between the interface module and where the cable enters or exits

the cabinet.

SU11 terminal

assignment

Screening

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-5

Edition 12.2004

The front panel and if relevant, a connector housing, initially have no contact

to the electronics ground of the module. The front panel is only connected to

the electronics ground of the module via the backplane bus connector (L/C

bus connection) and a cable connection, which can be released, between

the backplane bus and the subrack housing.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data"

5.1.4 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.5 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 600 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 200 mA

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 200 mA

No. 8

Output voltage, min. - 10 V

Output voltage, max. + 10 V

Output current +/- 10 mA max.

Output current (at +/- 10 V) +/- 5 mA

(recommended to suppress noise)

Resolution 13 bits + sign (corresponds to 1 mV)

Accuracy 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV)

Short-circuit protection to ground With 56 Ohm resistor

Short-circuit duration 120 s

Total load All outputs simultaneously, each 10 mA

Temperature dependency Max. 240 μV/degrees

Error

absolute linearity +/-0.6 mV

differential linearity +/- 1 mV

monotony 14 bits (corresponds to 1 mV)

Ground

connections

Other information

General data

Power supply

Analog outputs

Input/output modules

5-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.1.5 Connecting diagram

bus

EA12

20pin

SC12

SU11

l=2m 8 A

8 analog outp. AO

Fig. 5-1 Connecting cables and interface modules

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-7

Edition 12.2004

5.2 Input/output module EB11

6DD1641-0AC0

• 32 binary inputs and outputs

• 2 40-pin connectors

• 2*8 binary inputs and outputs per connector

• binary outputs with thermal overload protection

• 2 LED keys to reset after an overload condition

• L-bus connection

An overloaded binary output due to an excessively high current (thermal

overload, e. g. short-circuit) is electronically shutdown. The output is

switched into an open-circuit condition. The LED key of the associated

connector lights-up.

The associated output is operational again after a recovery time (during

which time it cools-down). To realize this, the associated electronics must be

reset; this can be done in 2 ways:

• Using the background program of the CPU module, on which the

associated binary output function block is configured.

For a normal CPU utilization, this reset takes several seconds after

cooling-down.

Resetting can take somewhat longer for extremely high CPU loading

levels.

• By depressing the illuminated LED key.

Key assignment:

− connector X5: Key S1

− connector X6: Key S2

Order No.

Features

Overload

protection

Input/output modules

5-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.2.1 Supplementary components

All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to

the module, but via interface modules. The interface modules are used as

mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) and also to

electrically adapt the plant/system signals and convert them (optional).

Interface

module

Function

SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)

of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion

SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal

level), LED, electrically isolated (floating)

SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrically

isolated (floating)

SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover

relay), LED, electrically isolated (floating)

SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)

SU11 20 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion

SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion

Table 5-4 Interface modules which can be connected to the module

The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-

in cables. A plug-in cable has several cable ends to connect several

interface modules:

• SC13 to connect 4 interface modules (SBxx, SU12)

• SC55 to connect 2 SU11

Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display),

different interface modules can be connected at the binary inputs and

outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC13

cable must be selected:

Cable SC55

max. 2 interface modules, type

SC13 cable

max. 4 interface modules, type

SU11

(20 screw terminals,

no signal conversion)

SB10

SB60

SB61

SB70

SB71

SU12

Table 5-5 Cable and interface modules which can be connected to EB11, connectors X5, X6

Interface modules

with terminals

Cables

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-9

Edition 12.2004

5.2.2 Connector- and terminal assignment

5.2.2.1 Terminal assignment for SC55

EB11

X5,

Significance SU11

at SC55,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

1 Binary output 1 1

2 Binary output 2 2

3 Binary output 3 3

4 Binary output 4 4

5 Binary output 5 5 X5A

6 Binary output 6 6 X6A

7 Binary output 7 7

8 Binary output 8 8

9 External 24 V 9

10 External ground 10

11 Binary output 9 11

12 Binary output 10 12

13 Binary output 11 13

14 Binary output 12 14

15 Binary output 13 15 X5B

16 Binary output 14 16 X6B

17 Binary output 15 17

18 Binary output 16 18

19 External 24 V 19

20 External ground 20

Table 5-6 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end A

SU11 terminal

assignment at

SC55, end A

Input/output modules

5-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

EB11

X5,

Significance SU11

at SC55,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

1 Binary input 1 1

2 Binary input 2 2

3 Binary input 3 3

4 Binary input 4 4 X5C

5 Binary input 5 5 X6C

6 Binary input 6 6

7 Binary input 7 7

8 Binary input 8 8

9 External 24 V 9

10 External ground 10

11 Binary input 9 11

12 Binary input 10 12

13 Binary input 11 13

14 Binary input 12 14

15 Binary input 13 15 X5D

16 Binary input 14 16 X6D

17 Binary input 15 17

18 Binary input 16 18

19 External 24 V 19

20 External ground 20

Table 5-7 SU11 terminal assignment for SC55, cable end B

SU11 terminal

assignment at

SC55, end B

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-11

Edition 12.2004

5.2.2.2 Terminal assignment for SC13

At the particular cable ends, only certain signal types are available, where

only the correct interface modules can be used:

Interface

module

Screw

terminal

(x=1...8)

Significance

SB10

1:1 screw terminal

Signal

Reference potential (ground or P24)

SB60

Binary inputs 115/230 V

Ground

Binary input 115 V

Binary input 230 V

SB61

Binary inputs 24/48 V

Binary input 24 V

Binary input 48 V

Reference

SB70

Binary outputs (relay)

Common (center contact)

NC contact

NO contact

SB71

Binary outputs (transistor)

Signal

Ground

Table 5-8 Terminal assignment, interface module

Terminal

assignment,

interface module

Input/output modules

5-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

EB11

X5,X6

Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/1

1/51

2 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/2

2/52

3 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3

3/53

4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4

4/54

5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5

5/55

6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6

6/56

7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7

7/57

8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8

8/58

9 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P

10 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-9 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end A

EB11

X5,X6

Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/1

1/51

2 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/2

2/52

3 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/3

3/53

4 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/4

4/54

5 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/5

5/55

6 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/6

6/56

7 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/7

7/57

8 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/8

8/58

9 External 24 V

9 1P 1P 1P

10 External ground

10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-10 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end B

Terminal

assignment at

SC13, end A

Terminal

assignment at

SC13, end B

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-13

Edition 12.2004

EB11

X5,X6

Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

21 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

22 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

23 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

24 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

25 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

26 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

27 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

28 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

29 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P

30 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-11 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end C

EB11

X5,X6

Significance SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

31 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

32 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

33 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

34 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

35 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

36 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

37 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

38 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

39 External 24 V 9 1P 1P 1P

40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-12 Terminal assignment, interface modules at SC13, cable end D

5.2.3 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data"

Terminal

assignment at

SC13, end C

Terminal

assignment at

SC13, end D

Other information

Input/output modules

5-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.2.4 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.6 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 20 mA (only as reference)

+24V +20 V +30 V 0,2 A (from an external power

supply)

+ current drain of the connected

SB70, SB71 interface modules

+ current drain from the binary

outputs which are directly

connected at the binary outputs of

the connected components (when

using SB10, SU11, SU12)

No. 2 x 16

Input voltage +24 V rated value

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V; or open-circuit binary inputs

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current for an 1 signal 5 mA typ.

Delay time 200 µs

No. 2 x 16

Power supply voltage

rated value +24 V DC

ripple 3.6 V DC

permissible

range

+20 to +30 V, including ripple

briefly +35 V for < 0.5 s

Output current for a 1 signal

rated value 50 mA

permissible

range

0.2 mA to 50 mA

Short-circuit protection Thermal / electronic

Limiting inductive switch-off

voltage

To the supply +1 V

Residual current 20 µA for a 0 signal

Signal level

for 0 signal Max. 3 V

for 1 signal Min. supply - 2.5 V

Delay time 15 µs

General data

Power supply

Binary inputs

Binary outputs

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-15

Edition 12.2004

5.2.5 Connecting diagram

bus

EB11

40pin

2*8 binary outp. BO

2*8 binary inp. BI

8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI

SC13

A B C D

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

l=4*2m

SC55

8 BO

8 BI

8 BO

SU11 SU11

l=2*2m

(each,

10core

)

8 BI

(each, 20core)

40pin

2*8 binary outp. BO

2*8 binary inp. BI

8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI

SC13

A B C D

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

l=4*2m

SC55

8 BO

8 BI

8 BO

SU11 SU11

l=2*2m

(each,

10core)

8 BI

(each, 20core)

Fig. 5-2 Connecting cables and interface modules

Input/output modules

5-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.3 Expansion module IT41

6DD1606-3AC0

The IT41 expansion module provides

incremental encoder inputs and

analog and binary inputs and outputs

The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A

maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.

An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module

itself).

• 4 analog outputs

• 4 analog inputs

• 16 binary outputs

• 16 binary inputs

• 4 incremental encoders with monitoring tracks

• 1 alarm (interrupt) input for each incremental encoder

• 1 alarm (interrupt) reset output for each incremental encoder

Pulse

sensing 1/2

Pulse

sensing 3/4

T filter

Driver

50 mA- driver

Latch

Monitoring inputs,

alarm identification,

alarm reset

Dual

port

RAM

IT41

controller

Local expansion bus

P5 M P15 N15

Analog

outputs

Analog

inputs

16 binary inputs

16 binary outputs

Pulse/sony

encoder

inputs

Electrical isolation

Changeov.

switch

Changeov.

switch

Changeov.

switch

Changeov.

switch

Monitoring inputs

and outputs for

4 encoders

Fig. 5-3 Block diagram of IT41

Order No.

Description

Inputs and outputs

Block diagram

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-17

Edition 12.2004

Incremental encoders can be connected to IT41, with:

• 2 tracks, displaced through 90º, A, B and if required zero pulse

• separate pulses for forwards- and reverse pulses,

e. g. Sony encoders

The selection is configured at the speed actual value function block.

Incremental encoders with the following signal voltages can be connected to

IT41

• 15V

• 5V (also as push-pull signals or RS485 differential signals)

Incremental

encoder types

Selecting the

encoder signal

voltage

Input/output modules

5-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

The signal voltage is selected, i. e. the associated receive driver is

connected by inserting 2 coding plugs, lying one behind the other, into a

certain setting (also refer to the following diagram).

If the coding plug is used so that the closed wire jumper is towards the front

panel of the IT41, then a 5V encoder has been selected.

If the interrupted jumpers point towards the front panel, a 15V encoder has

been selected. This is the factory setting.

NOTE 15V encoders with separate forwards/reverse tracks cannot be used

without any further measures.

(Component side IT41)

X100

X200

X300

X400

X101

X201

X301

X401

Configured for 5 V encoders

(e. g. SONY)

Configured for 15 V encoders

Front panel

Fig. 5-4 Assignment of the coding plug for incremental encoders

WARNING If coding plugs are incorrectly inserted, the inputs could be destroyed

when pulses are input!

Coding plug

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-19

Edition 12.2004

5.3.1 Supplementary components

All of the cables for the input/output signals are not directly connected to the

module, but via interface modules. The interface modules serve as

mechanical connecting element (screw/plug-in terminals) as well as

electrically adapting and converting the plant signals (optional).

Interface

module

Function

SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)

of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion

SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (module signal

level), LED, electrical isolation (floating)

SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical

isolation (floating)

SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover

relay), LED, electrical isolation (floating)

SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)

SU10 25 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion

SU12 10 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion

Table 5-13 Interface modules which can be connected to the module

The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-

in cables. Cables for large connectors have several cable ends to which the

appropriate number of matching interface modules can be connected.

Interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level

adaption, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connectors

with binary inputs and outputs.

The cable selection depends on the interface modules used:

Connector

IT41

Signals Cable Interface module

X6 Incremental encoder

analog outputs

SC49

2 x SU10

X7 Analog inputs

binary inputs/outputs

SC49

SC54

2 x SU10

5 x SB10

SB60

SB61

SB70

SB71

SU12

Table 5-14 Cables to be used with the various modules

Interface modules

with terminals

Cables

Input/output modules

5-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.3.2 Connector assignment X6

Connector X6 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for

• 4 incremental encoders

• 4 analog outputs

Two SU10 interface modules can be connected via an SC49 plug-in cable

("1:1" connection from the module to terminals):

IT41

Encoder with

tracks displaced through

90º

Encoder

with

forwards/

reverse

tracks

SU 10

at the

cable

end

Connector designation

when configuring

1 Track A+ V+ 1

34 Track A- V- 2

18 Encoder

Track B+ R+ 3 X6A

2 Track B- R- 4

35 Zero pulse+ - 5

19 Zero pulse- - 6

3 Track A+ V+ 7

36 Track A- V- 8

20 Encoder

Track B+ R+ 9 X6B

4 Track B- R- 10

37 Zero pulse+ - 11

21 Zero pulse- - 12

5 Track A+ V+ 13

38 Track A- V- 14

22 Encoder

Track B+ R+ 15 X6C

6 Track B- R- 16

39 Zero pulse+ - 17

23 Zero pulse- - 18

7 Track A+ V+ 19

40 Track A- V- 20

24 Encoder

Track B+ R+ 21 X6D

8 Track B- R- 22

41 Zero pulse+ - 23

25 Zero pulse- - 24

9 Encoder power supply

approx. +15 V DC, max. 100 mA

Not assigned 26

Table 5-15 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49,

end A

SU10 encoder

connections at

SC49, end A

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-21

Edition 12.2004

IT41

Encoder with

tracks displaced

through 90º

Encoder with

forwards/

reverse

tracks

SU 10

at cable

end

Connector

designation

when

configuring

42 Encoder ground 1

26 Encoder ground 2

10 Monitoring input,

encoder 1

43 Monitoring input,

encoder 2

27 Monitoring input,

encoder 3

11 Monitoring input,

encoder 4

44 Alarm input 1 7

28 Alarm input 2 8

12 Alarm input 3 9

45 Alarm input 4 10

29 Alarm output 1 11

13 Alarm output 2 12

46 Alarm output 3 13

30 Alarm output 4 14

14 Alarm ground 15

47 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 16

31 Ground (de-coupled) Analog outputs 17

15 Analog output 1 18 X6E

48 Ground 19

32 Analog output 2 20 X6F

16 Ground 21

49 Analog output 3 22 X6G

33 Ground 23

17 Analog output 4 24 X6H

50 Ground 25

Table 5-16 Pin assignment IT41, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10 at SC49,

end B

SU10 terminal

assignment at

SC49, end B

Input/output modules

5-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.3.3 Connector assignment X7

Connector X7 (50 pin, sub D) connects signals for:

• 4 analog inputs

• 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs

Depending on the required function (signal conversion, LED display)

different interface modules can be connected to the binary inputs and

outputs. If interface modules with signal conversion are used, the SC54

cable must be used:

SC49 cable

max. 2 interface modules, type

SC54 cable

max. 5 interface modules, type

SU10

(25 screw terminals,

no signal conversion)

SB10

SB60

SB61

SB70

SB71

SU12

Table 5-17 Cables and interface modules which can be connected at IT41, connector X7

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-23

Edition 12.2004

5.3.3.1 Connector assignment X7 for SC49

IT41

Significance SU 10

at SC49,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

1 Binary output 1 1

34 Binary output 2 2

18 Binary output 3 3

2 Binary output 4 4

35 Binary output 5 5 X7A

19 Binary output 6 6

3 Binary output 7 7

36 Binary output 8 8

20 External P24 voltage 9

4 External ground 10

37 Binary output 9 11

21 Binary output 10 12

5 Binary output 11 13

38 Binary output 12 14

22 Binary output 13 15 X7B

6 Binary output 14 16

39 Binary output 15 17

23 Binary output 16 18

7 External P24 voltage 19

40 External ground 20

24 Binary input 1 21

8 Binary input 2 22

41 Binary input 3 23 X7C

25 Binary input 4 24

9 Binary input 5 25

Table 5-18 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A

SU10 terminal

assignment at

SC49, end A

Input/output modules

5-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

IT41

Significance SU 10

at SC49,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

42 Binary input 6 1

26 Binary input 7 2 X7C

10 Binary input 8 3

43 External P24 voltage 4

27 External ground 5

11 Binary input 9 6

44 Binary input 10 7

28 Binary input 11 8

12 Binary input 12 9 X7D

45 Binary input 13 10

29 Binary input 14 11

13 Binary input 15 12

46 Binary input 16 13

30 External P24 voltage 14

14 External ground 15

47 Reference ground for

differential analog input

31 Reference ground for

differential analog input

15 Analog input 1+ 18 X7E

48 Analog input 1- 19

32 Analog input 2+ 20 X7F

16 Analog input 2- 21

49 Analog input 3+ 22 X7G

33 Analog input 3- 23

17 Analog input 4+ 24 X7H

50 Analog input 4- 25

Table 5-19 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end B

SU10 terminal

assignment at

SC49, end B

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-25

Edition 12.2004

5.3.3.2 Connector assignment X7 for SC54

Only specific signal types are available at the cable ends, where only the

matching interface modules can be used:

Interface

module

Screw

terminal

(x=1...8)

Significance

SB10

1:1 screw terminal connection

Signal

Reference potential (ground or P24)

SB60

Binary inputs 115/230 V

Ground

Binary input 115 V

Binary input 230 V

SB61

Binary inputs 24/48 V

Binary input 24 V

Binary input 48 V

Reference

SB70

Binary outputs (relay)

Common (center contact)

NC contact

NO contact

SB71

Binary outputs (transistor)

Signal

Ground

Table 5-20 Terminal assignment, interface modules

IT41

Significance

X7A

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51

34 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52

18 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53

2 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54

35 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55

19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56

3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57

36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58

20 External voltage

(24 V)

9 1P 1P 1P

4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-21 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7,SC54 - end A

Terminal

assignment,

interface modules

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end A

Input/output modules

5-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

IT41

Significance

X7B

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

37 Binary output 9 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51

21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52

5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53

38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54

22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55

6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56

39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57

23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58

7 External voltage

(24 V)

9 1P 1P 1P

40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-22 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - end B

IT41

Significance

X7C

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

43 External voltage

(24 V)

9 1P 1P 1P

27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-23 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end C

IT41

Significance

X7D

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

30 External voltage

(24 V)

9 1P 1P 1P

14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-24 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end D

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end B

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end C

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end D

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-27

Edition 12.2004

IT41

Significance

X7E-X7H

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

47 Reference ground

for differential

analog inputs

31 Reference ground

for differential

analog inputs

15 Analog input 1+ 3

48 Analog input 1- 4

32 Analog input 2+ 5

16 Analog input 2- 6

49 Analog input 3+ 7

33 Analog input 3- 8

17 Analog input 4+ 9

50 Analog input 4- 10

Table 5-25 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X7, SC54 - cable end E

5.3.4 Mounting

The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is

inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug

connector on the module).

All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces

provided (3 are provided)!

The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU modules must be retained using the

metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the

PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the

first expansion board.

The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3

screws, washers and spring washers supplied.

If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance

pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).

If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using

plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the

ITxx modules).

The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4

nuts provided (and washers).

The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.

5.3.5 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data"

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end E

Distance pieces

For the first ITxx

For the second

ITxx

Other information

Input/output modules

5-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.3.6 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.6 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA

+ encoder load

(max. 100 mA, electron. limited)

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA

24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents

Number 4

Type Differential inputs, non-floating

Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB

(1 LSB = 4.88 mV)

Input resistance 470 kOhm

Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz

Resolution 12 bits

Absolute accuracy Typ. 11 bits over the complete temperature

range

Max. conversion time 45 µs

Number 4

Type Outputs with associated ground terminal, non-

floating

Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Output current +/- 10 mA

Resolution 16 bits

Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range

Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature

range

Short-circuit protection to

ground

Yes

General data

Power supply

Analog inputs

Analog outputs

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-29

Edition 12.2004

Number 16 non-floating

Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

for 0 signal 0 mA

for 1 signal 3 mA typ.

Delay time 50 µs

Number 16, non-floating

Power supply voltage From external

nominal value 24 V DC

perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple

briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s

Output current for 1 signal

nominal current 50 mA (corresponds to max. value)

Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally

Limiting inductive switch-off

voltages

Power supply voltage + 1 V

Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal

Signal level

for 0 signal Max. 3 V

for 1 signal Power supply voltage - 2.5 V

Switching delay Max. 15 µs

Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 5 V encoder)

Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation

(optocoupler)

Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V

Input voltage (for 15 mA load)

for 0 signal -30 V to +4 V

for 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V

Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited)

Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)

Phase difference of the track

signals

Independent of the pulse frequency, min.

200 ns

Input filter Can be configured via software (function

block)

Binary inputs

Binary outputs

15 V incremental

encoders

Input/output modules

5-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Number of encoders Total, max. 4 (including 15 V encoder)

Type Differential inputs, floating (optocoupler)

Input voltage range Differential voltage -6 V to +6 V

Input voltage

for 0 signal -5 V to 0 V

for 1 signal +3 V to +5 V

Max. input current 15 mA

Caution: Is not limited!

Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)

Input circuit, cable

termination

steady-state 180 Ohm (series resistor)

dynamic 100 Ohm (corresponds to the characteristic

impedance of a twisted-pair cable)

Input filter Can be configured via software (function

block)

Number 4 (1 per encoder)

Type Not floating

Input voltage range 0 V to +5 V

Input voltage

for 0 signal < 1.4 V

for 1 signal > 2.0 V

Input current

for 0 signal Min. -5 mA, max. -3.6 mA

for 1 signal Min. -3 mA, max. 0 mA

Number 4 (1 per encoder)

Type Non-floating

Output voltage 15 V via 1 kOhm output resistance

Output voltage 5 V (for 10 mA load)

A Sony encoder HA 705 LK / MSD-560 can be connected without any signal

level adaption.

5 V incremental

encoders

Alarm inputs

Alarm reset

outputs

Sony encoder

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-31

Edition 12.2004

5.3.7 Connecting diagrams

IT41

8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI

SC49

4 AI

8 BO 3 BI

5 BI

8 BI

8 BO

50pin

4 analog inputs AI

4 analog outputs AO

2*8 binary outp. BO

2*8 binary inp. BI

SC54

A B C D E

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SU10

4 AI

SU10

SU12

CPU

inter-

face

bus

l=5*2m

(each,

10core)

l=2*2m

(each, 26core)

SC49

4 incremental

encoder

SU10 SU10

l=2*2m

(each, 26core)

50pin 4 AO

4 increm. encoders

Fig. 5-5 Connecting cables and interface modules

RD2

GND

+-P24

IT41/IT42 SB10

IT4xSB10.dsf

Fig. 5-6 Connecting binary outputs with SB10

Binary outputs

with SB10

Input/output modules

5-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

GND

P24

IT41/IT42 SU10

IT4xSU10.dsf

Fig. 5-7 Connecting binary outputs with SU10

Binary outputs

with SU10

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-33

Edition 12.2004

5.4 Expansion module IT42

6DD1606-4AB0

The IT42 expansion module provides

analog and binary inputs and outputs

The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A

maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.

An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the mounting slot of the CPU module

itself).

• 4 analog outputs

• 4 integrating, high-resolution analog inputs

(V/fc voltage/frequency conversion)

• 4 analog inputs (ADU)

• 16 binary outputs

• 16 binary inputs

T filter

Driver

50 mA

driver

Latch

Dual

port

RAM

IT42

controller

Local expansion bus

P5 M P15 N15

Electrical isolation

16 binary inputs

16 binary output

Analog outputs

Analog inputs

UFC

Counter 1/2

Counter 3/4

12 bit

16 bit

Integrating

analog inputs

External trigger

inputs

Contr. bus

Data bus

Address bus

Fig. 5-8 Block diagram of IT42

Order No.

Description

Inputs and outputs

Block diagram

Input/output modules

5-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.4.1 Supplementary components

All of the cables for the input / output signals are not directly connected to

the module, but are connected via interface modules. The interface modules

serve as mechanical connection element (screw/plug-in terminals) and to

electrically adapt the plant/system signals (optional).

Interface

module

Function

SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)

of 8 binary inputs/outputs, LED, no signal conversion

SB60 8 binary inputs, converted from 230V to 24V (signal level on the

module), LED, electrical isolation (floating)

SB61 8 binary inputs, converted from 48V to 24V, LED, electrical

isolation (floating)

SB70 8 binary outputs, converted from 24V to 230V (changeover relay),

LED, electrical isolation (floating)

SB71 8 binary outputs, converted from 25V to 48V (transistor)

SU10 25 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion

SU12 10 signals are directly connected, no signal conversion

Table 5-26 Interface modules which can be connected to the module

The module is connected to the interface modules using the matching plug-

in cables. The plug-in cables for large connectors have several cable ends,

to which the appropriate number of matching interface modules can be

connected.

Either interface modules with or without signal conversion (e. g. signal level

conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be connected at

connectors with binary inputs and outputs.

The selected cable depends on the type of interface module:

Connector

IT42

Signals Cable Interface module

X6 Integrating analog inputs SC50 SU10

X7 Analog outputs/inputs SC51 SU10

X8 Binary outputs/inputs;

trigger inputs for integrating

analog inputs

SC49

SC54

2 x SU10

5 x SB10

SB60

SB61

SB70

SB71

SU12

Table 5-27 Cables available for use with the module

Interface modules

with terminals

Cables

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-35

Edition 12.2004

5.4.2 Connector assignment X6

Connector X6 (15-pin, sub D) connects the signals for

• 4 integrating analog inputs

An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC50 ("1:1

connection from the module to the terminals:

IT42

Significance SU10 Connector

designation when

configuring

1 UFC analog input 1+ 1

9 UFC analog input 1- 2 X6A

2 Ground, input 1 3

10 Ground, input 2 4

3 UFC analog input 2+ 5 X6B

11 UFC analog input 2- 6

4 UFC analog input 3+ 7

12 UFC analog input 3- 8 X6C

5 Ground, input 3 9

13 Ground, input 4 10

6 UFC analog input 4+ 11 X6D

14 UFC analog input 4- 12

7 Not connected 13

15 Not connected 14

8 Not connected 15

- Not connected 16 - 26

Table 5-28 Pin assignment IT42, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU10

5.4.3 Connector assignment X7

Connector X7 (25-pin, sub D) connects the signals for

• 4 analog outputs

• 4 analog inputs

An SU10 interface module can be connected via plug-in cable SC51.

Integrating analog

inputs

at X6 with SU10

Input/output modules

5-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

IT42

Significance SU10 Connector

designation when

configuring

1 ADU analog input 1+ 1 X7A

14 ADU analog input 1- 2

2 ADU analog input 2+ 3 X7B

15 ADU analog input 2- 4

3 ADU analog input 3+ 5 X7C

16 ADU analog input 3- 6

4 ADU analog input 4+ 7 X7D

17 ADU analog input 4- 8

5 Reference ground for

differential ADU analog

inputs

(due to push-pull)

18 Reference ground for

differential ADU analog

inputs

(due to push-pull)

6 Analog output 1+ 11 X7E

19 Ground, inductively de-

coupled

7 Analog output 2+ 13 X7F

20 Ground, inductively de-

coupled

8 Analog output 3+ 15 X7G

21 Ground, inductively de-

coupled

9 Analog output 4+ 17 X7H

22 Ground, inductively de-

coupled

10 Ground 19

23 Ground 20

11 Not connected 21

12 Not connected 22

13 Not connected 23

24 Not connected 24

25 Not connected 25

- Not connected 26

Table 5-29 Pin assignment IT42, connector X7 and terminal assignment SU10

Analog

inputs/outputs

at X7 with SU10

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-37

Edition 12.2004

5.4.4 Connector assignment X8

Connector X8 (50 pin, sub D) connects the signals for:

• 2*8 binary inputs and 2*8 binary outputs

• 4 trigger signals for integrating analog inputs

The assignment of the 16 binary inputs and outputs corresponds to those of

IT41, connector X7.

5.4.4.1 Connector assignment X8 for SC49

IT42

Significance SU10

at SC49,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

1 Binary output 1 1

34 Binary output 2 2

18 Binary output 3 3

2 Binary output 4 4

35 Binary output 5 5 X8A

19 Binary output 6 6

3 Binary output 7 7

36 Binary output 8 8

20 External P24 voltage 9

4 External ground 10

37 Binary output 9 11

21 Binary output 10 12

5 Binary output 11 13

38 Binary output 12 14

22 Binary output 13 15 X8B

6 Binary output 14 16

39 Binary output 15 17

23 Binary output 16 18

7 External P24 voltage 19

40 External ground 20

24 Binary input 1 21

8 Binary input 2 22

41 Binary input 3 23 X8C

25 Binary input 4 24

9 Binary input 5 25

Table 5-30 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A

SU10 terminal

assignment at

SC49, end A

Input/output modules

5-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

IT42

Significance SU10

at SC49,

cable end

Connector

designation when

configuring

42 Binary input 6 1

26 Binary input 7 2 X8C

10 Binary input 8 3

43 External P24 voltage 4

27 External ground 5

11 Binary input 9 6

44 Binary input 10 7

28 Binary input 11 8

12 Binary input 12 9

45 Binary input 13 10 X8D

29 Binary input 14 11

13 Binary input 15 12

46 Binary input 16 13

30 External P24 voltage 14

14 External ground 15

47 Trigger input 1 16

31 Trigger input 2 17

15 Trigger input 3 18

48 Trigger input 4 19

32 Not connected 20

16 Not connected 21

49 Not connected 22

33 Not connected 23

17 External P24 voltage 24

50 External ground 25

Table 5-31 SU10 terminal assignment for SC49, cable end A

SU10 terminal

assignment at

SC49, end B

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-39

Edition 12.2004

5.4.4.2 Connector assignment X8 for SC54

Only certain signal types are available at the particular cable ends where

only the matching interface modules can be used:

Interface

module

Screw

terminal

(x=1...8)

Significance

SB10

1:1 screw terminal connection

Signal

Reference potential (ground or P24)

SB60

Binary inputs 115/230 V

Ground

Binary input 115 V

Binary input 230 V

SB61

Binary inputs 24/48 V

Binary input 24 V

Binary input 48 V

Reference

SB70

Binary outputs (relay)

Common (center contact)

NC contact

NO contact

SB71

Binary outputs (transistor)

Signal

Ground

Table 5-32 Terminal assignment of the interface modules

IT42

Significance

X8A

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

1 Binary output 1 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51

34 Binary output 2 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52

18 Binary output 3 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53

2 Binary output 4 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54

35 Binary output 5 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55

19 Binary output 6 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56

3 Binary output 7 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57

36 Binary output 8 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58

20 External P24

voltage

9 1P 1P 1P

4 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-33 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end A

Terminal

assignment,

interface modules

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end A

Input/output modules

5-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

IT42

Significance

X8B

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

37 Binary output 9 1 1/51 12/11/14 1/51

21 Binary output 10 2 2/52 22/21/24 2/52

5 Binary output 11 3 3/53 32/31/34 3/53

38 Binary output 12 4 4/54 42/41/44 4/54

22 Binary output 13 5 5/55 52/51/54 5/55

6 Binary output 14 6 6/56 62/61/64 6/56

39 Binary output 15 7 7/57 72/71/74 7/57

23 Binary output 16 8 8/58 81/82/84 8/58

7 External P24

voltage

9 1P 1P 1P

40 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-34 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end B

IT42

Significance

X8C

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

24 Binary input 1 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

8 Binary input 2 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

41 Binary input 3 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

25 Binary input 4 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

9 Binary input 5 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

42 Binary input 6 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

26 Binary input 7 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

10 Binary input 8 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

43 External P24

voltage

9 1P 1P 1P

27 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-35 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end C

IT42

Significance

X8D

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

11 Binary input 9 1 1/51 14,12/11 1,11/51

44 Binary input 10 2 2/52 24,22/21 2,12/52

28 Binary input 11 3 3/53 34,32/31 3,13/53

12 Binary input 12 4 4/54 44,42/41 4,14/54

45 Binary input 13 5 5/55 54,52/51 5,15/55

29 Binary input 14 6 6/56 64,62/61 6,16/56

13 Binary input 15 7 7/57 74,72/71 7,17/57

46 Binary input 16 8 8/58 84,82/81 8,18/58

30 External P24

voltage

9 1P 1P 1P

14 External ground 10 1M 1M 1M

Table 5-36 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end D

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end B

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end C

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end D

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-41

Edition 12.2004

IT42

Significance

X8E-X8H

SU12 SB10 SB60 SB61 SB70 SB71

47 Trigger input 1 1

31 Trigger input 2 2

15 Trigger input 3 3

48 Trigger input 4 4

32 Not connected 5

16 Not connected 6

49 Not connected 7

33 Not connected 8

17 External P24 voltage 9

50 External ground 10

Table 5-37 Terminal assignment, interface module at connector X8, SC54 - cable end E

5.4.5 Mounting

The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is

inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug

connector on the module).

All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces

provided (3 are provided)!

The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module, must be retained using the

metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the

PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the

first expansion board.

The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3

screws, washers and spring washers supplied.

If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance

pieces using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).

If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using

plastic distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the

ITxx modules).

The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4

nuts provided (and washers).

The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.

5.4.6 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data"

Terminal

assignment at

SC54, end E

Distance pieces

For the first ITxx

For the second

ITxx

Other information

Input/output modules

5-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.4.7 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.5 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA

24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 100 mA + binary output currents

No. 4

Integrating analog inputs Differential inputs, floating, V/f conversion

Integration time • sampling time of the AFC function block or

• the time between 2 positive edges of the

external trigger signal

Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Input resistance 470 kOhm

Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 2 kHz

Resolution Up to 17 bits, depending on the integration time:

13 bits at 1 ms integration time

15 bits at 4 ms integration time

17 bits at 20 ms integration time

Relative accuracy Typ. 14 bits

No. 4

Type Differential inputs, non-floating

Input voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Input resistance 470 kOhm

Input filter -3 dB transition frequency : 1.5 kHz

Resolution 12 bits

Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature

range

Max. conversion time 45 µs.

General data

Power supply

Integrating analog

inputs

Sampling analog

inputs

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-43

Edition 12.2004

No. 4

Type Output with associated ground, non-floating

Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Output current +/- 10 mA

Resolution 16 bits

Monotony 14 bits over the complete temperature range

Absolute accuracy Typ. 13 bits over the complete temperature

range

Short-circuit protection to

ground

Yes

No. 16 non-floating

Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

for 0 signal 0 mA

for 1 signal 3 mA typ.

Delay time

for +24 V input signal

50 µs

No. 16, non-floating

Power supply voltage From external

nominal value 24 V DC

perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple

it briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s

Output current for an 1 signal

nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to the max. value)

Short-circuit protection Electronically and thermally

Limiting inductive switch-off

voltages

Supply voltage + 1 V

Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal

Signal level

for 0 signal Max. 3 V

for 1 signal Supply voltage - 2.5 V

Switching delay Max. 15 µs

Analog outputs

Binary inputs

Binary outputs

Input/output modules

5-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.4.8 Connecting diagram

(integrating, V/f)

IT42

8 BO 8 BI8 BO 8 BI

SC49

4 trigger integrating AI

8 BO 3 BI

5 BI

8 BI8 BO

15pin

25pin

50pin

4 analog inputs AI

4 analog outp. AO

2*8 binary outp. BO

2*8 binary inp. BI

4 trigger signals

for integrating AI

SC50

4 AI,

integrating

SC51

4 AI

SC54

4 AO

A B C D E

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB70

SB71

SU12

SB10

SB60

SB61

SU12

SU10 SU10

SU12

CPU

inter-

face

bus

SU10

4 analog inp. AI

l=5*2m

(each, 10core)

l=2m

l=2*2m

(each, 26core)

4 trigger

integrating AI

Fig. 5-9 Connecting cables and interface modules

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-45

Edition 12.2004

5.5 Converter control ITDC

6DD1601-0AH0

The ITDC expansion module corresponds to the earlier PG16 module, and

provides the gating (control) for

• line-commutated drive converters.

It includes:

• Auto-reversing stage

• Current controller

• Gating unit (for max. 400 Hz output frequency)

• For 6-pulse drive converters

It is especially suitable for connection to SITOR power sections.

The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A

maximum of 2 expansion modules ITxx can be inserted on a CPU module.

One ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the slot in the CPU module).

Presently, the operation of 2 ITDC modules in one processor module is not

supported.

• 1 SITOR interface

• 2 analog outputs

• 4 binary outputs

• 4 binary inputs

• 1 incremental encoder input:

 With zero pulse

 Optionally, for differential signals

 For tracks, shifted through 90 degrees (A, B)

 For 15 V (HTL)- or 5 V encoders

 Max. 1 MHz pulse frequency

• No electrical isolation of the inputs-/outputs

Incremental encoders can be connected to the ITDC, with the following

signal voltages

• 15V

• 5V (also as push - pull signals and RS485 differential signals)

The incremental encoder type is selected using DIL switch S1 on the

component side of the ITDC (refer to the following diagram ).

There is the following assignment of the DIL switch settings S1.X to the

pulse encoder channels :

Switch Switch

setting

Function

S1.1 ON Track A, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders

S1.1 OFF Track A, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders

S1.2 ON Track B, zero volt switching threshold f. 5V encoders

S1.2 OFF Track B, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders

S1.3 ON Zero pulse, 0V switching threshold f. 5V encoders

S1.3 OFF Zero pulse, 7V switching threshold f. 15V encoders

S1.4 any none

Order No.

Description

Inputs and outputs

Incremental

encoder setting

Input/output modules

5-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Corresponding to the setting of the switch on S1, either select the

15V 3-phase encoder (7V switching threshold) or 5V 3-phase encoder (0V

switching threshold).

For the factory setting, the switch is in the OFF position for 15V 3-phase

encoders.

(Component side ITDC)

OFF

1234

H10

H11

Switch position for 15V 3-phase encoders

(OFF switch setting)

Fig. 5-10 Switch position for incremental encoders

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-47

Edition 12.2004

50 mA driverLatch

ITDC

controller

and

gating unit

Local expansion bus

Address bus

Data bus

Control bus

P5 M P15 N15

4 binary outputs

2 analog outputs

Data bus

Address bus

Control bus

Changeov. switch

Pulse

sensing 5V/15V

T filt er

Driver

4 binary intputs

ASIC U1

Speed input

5V/15V

ASIC U1

Curr. act. val. sens.

Zero current sens.

Volt. act. val. sens.

Watchdog

Main pulse length

Second pulse length

Line count er L12

Line count er Usyn

Line angular encoder

Line count er L13

Pulse generator

Sitor interface

Actual values

Pulse end stage

ASIC U1

Line counter Vsyn2

Line counter Vsyn3

Fig. 5-11 Block diagramm ITDC

Block diagram

Input/output modules

5-48 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.5.1 Supplementary components

All of the input / output signal cables are not directly connected to the

module, but are connected through interface modules. The interface

modules serve as mechanical connecting elements (screw plug-in

terminals), and to electrically adapt the plant /system signals and convert

them (optional).

Interface-

module

Function

SB10 Direct connection (1:1 connection)

from 8 binary inputs /outputs, LED, no signal conversion

SB60 8 binary inputs, 230V to 24V conversion (signal level of the

module), LED, electrical isolation

SB61 8 binary inputs, 48V to 24V conversion, LED, electrical

isolation

SB70 8 binary outputs, 24V to 230V conversion (changeover relay),

LED, electrical isolation

SB71 8 binary outputs, 25V to 48V conversion (transistor)

SU11 20 signals can be directly connected, no signal conversion

Table 5-38 Interface modules which can be connected to the module

The module is connected to the interface modules using plug-in cables. Pre-

assembled cables are available for the SU11 interface module.

Interface modules either with or without signal conversion (e.g. signal level

conversion, electrical isolation) and LED display can be used at connector

X5 with binary inputs and outputs.

Pre-assembled cables are not available for the SB10, SB60, SB61, SB70

and SB71 interface modules in conjunction with the ITDC.

Conn., ITDC Signals Cable Interface module

X5 Analog outputs

SITOR start-up signals

SC12

1 x SU11

X6 Binary inputs /outputs and

speed sensing

SC12

1 x SU11

or SB10

SB60

SB61

SB70

SB71

SU12

Table 5-39 Cables which can be used together with the modules

Interface modules

with terminals

Cables

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-49

Edition 12.2004

5.5.2 Connector assignment X5

Connector X5 (20-pin plug connector) connects signals for

• 2 analog outputs

• SITOR start-up signals

The SU11 interface module can be connected via SC12 plug-in cable (1:1-

connection from the module to the terminals):

ITDC

X5 Pin

Designation SU 11

Connector

designation for

configuring

1 Analog output 1+ 1 X5A

2 Ground, analog output 1 2

3 Analog output 2+ 3 X5B

4 Ground, analog output 2 4

5 External synchronizing voltage, L1 for 3-

phase synchronization

6 Reference voltage for the synchronizing

voltage

7 P15 output, 15V

(Ri =600 ohm, not suitable to supply the

encoders)

8 Measuring signal "Zero crossover of the

SITOR power supply phase voltage" L13

9 Display, zero crossover signal identification,

synchronizing voltage

Logic signal level 15V, Ri=2.2K ohm for an

"H" signal

10 External pulse inhibit, if connected to pin 7

or 24V -> pulses enabled

11 Excitation current setpoint, 0..10V, Ri=2.2K

ohm

12 Measuring signal "Summed pulses" 12

13 Analog current actual value +/-10V,

Ri=2.2K ohm

14 Ground (digital), reference potential for

measuring signals

15 Measuring signal, "Total pulse inhibit",

pulses enabled = 5V

16 Ground, synchronizing module 16

17 Synchronizing voltage U12 for 3-phase

synchronization

18 Synchronizing voltage U23 for 3-phase

synchronization

19 Synchronizing voltage U31 for 3-phase

synchronization

20 Pulse chain synchronizing, connected with

additional PG11/PG16 or ITDC

"H" output voltage: 10-14V

"H" output current: 40mA

Table 5-40 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X5 and terminal assignment SU11,

SU11 analog

outputs and start-

up signals via the

SC12 cable

Input/output modules

5-50 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

5.5.3 Connector assignment X6

Connector X6 (20-pin plug connector) connects the signals for:

• 4 binary inputs

• 4 binary outputs

• 1 speed input

The SU11 interface module can be connected via the SC12 plug-in cable

(1:1 connection from the module to the terminals):

ITDC

X6 Pin

Designation SU 11

Connector

designation

for

configuring

1 Binary input 1 1 X6A

2 Binary input 2 2

3 Binary input 3 3

4 Binary input 4 4

5 Binary output 1 5 X6G

6 Binary output 2 6

7 Binary output 3 7

8 Binary output 4 8

9 Pext, positive power supply, max. 30 V 9

10 Mext, 0V power supply 10

11 Speed sensing, track 1A- 11 X6C

12 Speed sensing, track 1A+ 12

13 Speed sensing, track 1B- 13

14 Speed sensing, track 1B+ 14

15 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N- 15

16 Speed sensing, zero pulse 1N+ 16

17 Coarse pulse 17

18 GND ext. 18

19 GND ext. 19

20 n. c. 20

Table 5-41 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X6 and terminal assignment SU11

5.5.4 Connector assignment X7

Connector X7 (sub-D 50-pin) connects the signals to control (gate) a SITOR

set (three-phase bridge).

Via plug-in cable:

• SC17.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 2m long), or

• SC31.2 (screened round cable, 50-pin SUB-D, 10m long)

The module can be directly connected to a SITOR set.

SU11 binary

input/output and

speed sensing via

cable SC12

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-51

Edition 12.2004

ITDC

X7 Pin

Designation Connector

designation

for

configuring

1 Screen X7G

2 Screen

3 Fuse monitoring (fault = "L")

4 Screen

5 Zero crossover (L1-L3)

6 Screen

7 +/- Iact frequency: 60KHz +/- 30KHz

corresponds to +/- 2 IN

8 Reference voltage, excitation current

setpoint

9 M24 external

10 Pulse. 1.6

11 M24 external

12 Pulse 1.3

13 Screen

14 M24 external

15 Pulse 2.4

16 M24 external

17 Pulse 2.1 X7G

18 VSYN (synchronizing voltage) neutral point

19 Excitation current monitoring (fault = "H")

IE_act < 3,3 %, IE_N = "H")

20 Temperature monitoring (fault = "L")

21 Screen

22 +/- VAIst frequency 60KHz +/- 30KHz

corresponds to +/- VAN

23 Screen

24 +/- Iact analog +/-10V corresponds to +/- IN

(only when connecting a SITOR set, for

SE20.1--> 2P24)

25 Screen

26 M24 external

27 Pulse 1.4

28 M24 external

29 Pulse 1.1

30 Pulse 2.2

31 M24 external

32 Pulse 2.5

33 M24 external

34 VSYN (L1)

35 Undervoltage monitoring (fault = "L")

36 Screen

37 Zero crossover (L1-L2)

SITOR signals

Input/output modules

5-52 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

ITDC

X7 Pin

Designation Connector

designation

for

configuring

38 Screen

39 I = 0 signal (I = 0 corresponds to "H")

40 Screen

41 Excitation current setpoint

IE_N_S (Feldsteller) corresponds to 10 V

42 Pulse 1.2

43 M24 external

44 Pulse 1.5

45 M24 external

46 M24 external

47 Pulse 2.6

48 M24 external

49 Pulse 2.3

50 Screen

Table 5-42 Pin assignment ITDC, connector X7 SITOR signals

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-53

Edition 12.2004

5.5.5 Technical data

Insulation group A according to VDE 0110 § 13 Group 2 for 24 V DC,

15 V DC, 5 V DC

Ambient temperature 0 to +55 degrees C and fan operation (force ventil.)

Storage temperature -25 to +70 degrees C

Humidity rating F according to DIN 40050

Altitude rating S according to DIN 40040

Mechanical rating Installed in stationary equipment, which is not

necessarily vibration-free

Packaging system ES 902 C

Dimensions 233.4 mm * 220 mm

Module width 20.14 mm

Installation size 1 slot

Weight 600 g

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 100 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 490 mA (+ encoder load)

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 75 mA

24 V (external) +15V +30 V 70 mA (+ load of the binary outputs)

No. 2

Version Output with associated ground,

non-floating

Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Output current +/- 10 mA

Resolution 12 bits

Monotony 10 bits over the complete temperature range

Absolute accuracy Typ. 9 bits over the complete temperature range

Short-circuit protection to

ground

Yes

No. 4 non-floating

Input voltage 24 V DC rated voltage

For 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit

For 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

For 0 signal 0 mA

For 1 signal 3 mA typ.

Delay time 120 µs

General data

Power supply

Analog outputs,

connector X5

Binary inputs

connector X6

Input/output modules

5-54 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

No. 4, non-floating

Supply voltage Must be supplied externally

Nominal value 24 V DC

Permiss. range +20 V to 30 V, including ripple

Briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s

Output current for 1 signal

Rated current 50 mA

Permiss. range To 50 mA

Short-circuit protection Electronic (thermal)

Limiting inductive switch-off

voltages

+ 1 V power supply voltage

Total load 80 % at 50 degrees C, all outputs 50 mA

Residual current 20 µA for a 0 signal

Signal level

For 0 signal Max. 3 V

For 1 signal - 2.5 V power supply voltage

Switching delay 1->0: max. 10 µs

0->1: max. 100 µs

No. of encoders 1, non-floating

Version Differential inputs without electrical isolation,

can be changed over between 5V/15V(HTL)

Track signals Tracks A and B (phase shifted through 90

degrees), if required with zero pulse N

Pulse frequency Max. 1 MHz (track frequency)

Phase difference of the track

signals

Independent of the pulse frequency, min 200 ns

Input voltage for 15V (HTL)

For 0 signal -30 V to +5 V

For 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V

Input voltage for 5V

For 0 signal -7 V to -1.5 V

For 1 signal +1.5 V to + 7 V

Permissible input voltage

range

Differential voltage, -30 V to +30 V

Input resistance Approx. 40K

Fault pulse suppression Can be configured at the speed actual value

function block: 0 - 16 µs (62.5 kHz)

The module does not provide a power supply for the encoder.

5.5.6 Mounting/Installation

When mounted outside the subrack, the ITxx module is inserted on a CPU

module PMx or on an ITxx module, already mounted on PMx (using a 96-pin

plug connector on the module).

All of the modules must be screwed to one another using the spacers

provided (3 spacers)!

The first ITxx, mounted directly on a CPU module, must be retained using

the metal spacers (these are included with the PMx). The electrical contact

which is established is required to identify the first expansion module.

The metal spacers are attached to the PMX using the M3 screws provided

together with the washers and spring washers.

Binary outputs

connector X6

Incremental

encoders

Spacers

For the first ITxx

Input/output modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 5-55

Edition 12.2004

If only one ITxx module is used, it can be screwed to the metal spacers

using the M4 nuts (and washers) provided.

If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx module is not screwed using

the nuts, but instead, using plastic spacers (these are included with the ITxx

modules).

The second ITxx module can then be inserted on the plastic spacers, and

screwed together using the M4 nuts (and washers).

After the module assembly has been screwed together, it is inserted into the

subrack.

5.5.7 Application information and noise immunity

• Operation without fans is possible

• Noise immune operation is only possible, if it is tightly screwed into the

subrack.

For more detailed information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to

the "General technical data" section!

5.5.8 Connecting diagrams

bus

20pin

50pin

20pin

SC31.2

SC17.2

(l=2m)

SITOR interface SE20.2

SITOR set

(each, 50pin)

SITOR

interface

SITOR-

diagnostics sig.

2 anal. outputs

4 dig. outputs DO

4 dig. inputs DI

1 incremental

encoder input

ITDC

SC12

(20pin)

l=2m

SU11

SC12

(20pin)

l=2m

SU11

2 AA

4 BA

4 BE

1 INC

Fig. 5-12 Connecting cables and interface modules

For a second ITxx

Other information

Input/output modules

5-56 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-1

Edition 12.2004

6 Communications support modules

6.1 Communications support modules CS 6-2

6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11 6-12

6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 6-15

6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL 6-21

6.5 Interface module SS1 6-23

6.6 Interface module SS2 6-27

6.7 Interface module SS31 6-29

6.8 Communications module SS4 6-31

6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52 6-41

Overview

Communications support modules

6-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.1 Communications support modules CS

6.1.1 Communications support module CS7

6DD1662-0AB0

The CS7 module is a support module for the following communication

modules:

• SS4

• SS5

• SS52

Serial data transfer protocols (DUST, USS, PROFIBUS) can be

implemented using the CS7 and the communication modules.

There is a dual port RAM on the CS7, via which the communication modules

can transfer data with the CPU modules.

• 3 plug-in recptacle for communication modules (X01 to X03)

• Dual port RAM with 16 Kbytes per communications module

• 2 diagnostic LEDs per plug-in compartment (H10/H11, H20/H21 ,

H30/H31) to display the status of the communications module;

the significance of the LED depends on the particular communications

module.

• Transfers the L-bus basic sampling time (for synchronization) on the

communications module;

this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules.

• Transfers the clock interrupt from the communications module to the CS7

to set the real-time clock of a CPU module;

this function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules.

• An interrupt signal on the L bus can be generated from the

communications module. However, it must be ensured that only one

interface module executes this function (configured).

This function is not used for SS4, SS5, SS52 communication modules,.

• Test socket pair for each plug-in receptacle (X10/X11, X20/X21,

X30/X31) to initiate a reset;

only for test purposes! not for operation!

• L-bus connection

Order No.

Description

Features

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-3

Edition 12.2004

The connection between the CS7 support module and the communications

modules is established via the 48-pin socket connectors of the 3 plug-in

receptacle X01, X02 and X03:

Pin A B C

1 P5 P5 L_LOCK

B10

B11

B12

6 L_RESET CTCLK

B13

7 DB0 DB1 DB2

8 DB3 DB4 DB5

9 DB6 DB7 DB8

10 DB9 DB10 DB11

11 DB12 DB13 DB14

12 DB15 L_DEN L_CSMSB

13 L_INTDPR DT_L_R L_CSLSB

14 L_RDYDPR L_LED1 L_LED2

15 P15 N15 L_INTUHR

16 M5 M5 M5

Interface to the

communications

module

Communications support modules

6-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.1.1.1 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• the front panels of the inserted communication modules must be

connected to the CS7 front panel using the screen cable supplied!

• slot covers must be provided at empty receptacle.

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

Other information

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-5

Edition 12.2004

SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AE0 SS5

SIEMENS 6DD1688-0AD0 SS4

SIEMENS 6DD1662-0AB0 CS7

X11

X10

H11

H10

X21

X20

H21

H20

X31

X30

H31

H30

Fig. 6-1 CS7 front panel

Communications support modules

6-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.1.1.2 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 2

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 40.28 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.5 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 0.5 A + current drain of the interface

modules

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface

modules

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface

modules

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-7

Edition 12.2004

6.1.1.3 Connecting diagram

L bus

CS7

26pin

SS4

9pin

SS5

SS52 9pin

SC57

l=5m

Cable 1

COM1/2

Operator

control unit

(PC)

9 pin

l=0.5m

Cable 2

9 pin

26 pin

SM8

Partial connector set

Connector assignment SS4

RS 232

TxD=4

RxD=17

Grd=9

RS 485 (USS-Bus)

+RS485P =5

-RS485N =17

Grd=9

D-Sub,

high density

Connector assignment SS5

RS 232 (Monitor)

TxD=7

RxD=2

Grd=5

RS 485 (PROFIBUS)

+Tx/Rx-Sig. =3

-Tx/Rx-Sig. =8

Grd=5

SM5

Partial connector set

Connector assignment SS52

RS 232 (Monitor)

TxD=7

RxD=2

Grd=5

RS 485 (PROFIBUS)

+Tx/Rx-Sig. =3

-Tx/Rx-Sig. =8

Grd=5

SM5

Partial connector set

D-Sub

DUST/USS

PROFIBUS FMS

PROFIBUS DP

Fig. 6-2 Connecting communication modules and cables

Communications support modules

6-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.1.2 Communications support module CS8

6DD1662-0AC0

The CS8 module is a support module for the following communication

modules:

• CBP1, CBP2

• CBC, CBD, CBI, CBL

Serial data transfer protocols (CAN, DEVICE-NET, PROFIBUS) can be

implemented using CS8 and the communication modules.

• 2 slots (X01, X02) to accept 2 communication modules (COMBOARDs).

• The special covers supplied must be mounted onto the COMBOARDs, so

that they are electrically connected and grounded, for EMC-, dust

protection- and safety reasons.

• L-bus connection

The connection between the CS8 support module and the communication

modules is established via the 64-pin plug connectors of the 2 slots X01 and

X02:

Pin-

No.

Signal-

name

Pin-

No.

Signal-

name

Pin-

No.

Signal-

name

Pin-

No.

Signal name

A1 N15 A9 D10 A17 M A25 L_BUSY

B1 N15 B9 D11 B17 P5 B25 L_INT_CU_DPR

A2 M A10 D12 A18 A8 A26 L_INT_DPR_CU

B2 M B10 D13 B18 A9 B26 TEMPERATURE

A3 D0 A11 D14 A19 A10 A27 L_DSAVE

B3 D1 B11 D15 B19 A11 B27 ATACHO_DPR

A4 D2 A12 M A20 A12 A28 BTACHO_DPR

B4 D3 B12 SYNC_DNE B20 Excitation B28 P15_OK

A5 D4 A13 NR_TACHO A21 M A29 P24_AUX

B5 D5 B13 A1 B21 P5 B29 M24_AUX

A6 D6 A14 A2 A22 L_RD A30 P15

B6 D7 B14 A3 B22 L_WR B30 P15

A7 M A15 A4 A23 L_CS A31 M

B7 P5 B15 A5 B23 SYNC_TAC B31 M

A8 D8 A16 A6 A24 M A32 SINE

B8 D9 B16 A7 B24 L_RESET B32 COSINE

Order No.

Description

Features

Interface to the

communications

module

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-9

Edition 12.2004

6.1.2.1 Application information and noise immunity

• Operation without fans possible

• The communication modules are screwed to the PC board of CS8! The

cut-outs of the covers supplied, must be adapted to the connector

dimensions of the communication modules.

• The cover is mounted between the CS8 and the communications

module.

• Free slots must be covered with complete covers.

• Noise-immune operation is only possible if they are screwed into the

subrack

For additional information on EMC and the ambient conditions, refer to

Section "General technical data“!

Other information

Communications support modules

6-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

SI EM EN S

6DD1662-0AC0

CS8

A B C X01

X02

1 (Cutout for COMBOARD)

2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)

3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece)

1 (Cutout for COMBOARD)

2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)

3 (Hole for mounting panel to the PC board over endpiece)

2 (Hole for mounting to the cover)

4 (Slot designation)

4 (Module designation, MLFB, product version)

Front panel

Captive nut for mounting

to the front panel

Captive nut for mounting

to the front

anel

Cover

Captive nut for mounting

to the front panel

Fig. 6-3 CS8 front panel and cover

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-11

Edition 12.2004

6.1.2.2 Technical data

Slot assignment 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 18.3 x 233.4 x 220

Weight approx. 0.3 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 0.5 A + current drain of the interface

modules

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V Current drain of the interface

modules

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Current drain of the interface

modules

6.1.2.3 Connection diagram

L-

Bus

Communikations

module CB..

Communikations

module CB..

CS8

X02

X01

Fig. 6-4 Possibilities of connecting communication modules

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

6-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.2 SINEC H1 module CSH11

6DD1661-0AB1

A connection to the industrial SINEC H1 communications network

(„Industrial Ethernet“) is established using the CSH11 module.

The module includes the CP1470 module (CP: Communications Processor)

and a dual port RAM to transfer data to the CPU modules.

• serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (X5)

• serial interface to connect to SINEC H1 (X6)

• diagnostics LED

• function selector switch and reset button

• transferring clock interrupts from the CP1470 onto the C bus

• L- and C bus connection

The 15-pin connector X6 is connected to SINEC H1 bus coupler via the

SINEC H1 drop cable 727-1. The drop cable must be latched into place

using the latch mechanism.

The maximum cable length of the bus coupling cable may not exceed 50 m.

A description of the SINEC H1 drop cable and additional bus components

and their Order Nos. are provided in Catalog "SINEC Industrial

Communication Networks, IK 10".

There is an asynchronous serial interface to parameterize the CP1470 (e. g.

setting the Ethernet address) and administration using the configuring

software SINEC NML from a PC, at the 25 pin connector X5.

SINEC NML must also be ordered:

Order No.: 6GK 1740-0AB01-0EA0

To connect PG7xx programmers or AT-compatible PCs, it also has

• a passive 20 mA line current interface (TTY) as well as

• RS 232 (V.24) interface

with a 9.6 kbaud baud rate.

A switch with the ADM/RUN/STP settings and a reset button are provided on

the front panel.

Switch position Function

ADM Resetting the CP1470 via reset button

RUN Communications is established

STP Communications is interrupted

Order No.

Description

Features

Connection to

SINEC H1

Ordering data

Parameterization

Switch

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-13

Edition 12.2004

The CP1470 can be reset using the reset button. The switch must first be

set to "ADM".

Green Red Significance

Dark Dark No power supply;

temporary initialization status

Lit Dark Database and synchronization O.K.

Flashi

Dark Database inconsistent; correct NML configuring

Dark Lit No synchronization with the initializing CPU module;

possible cause: @CSH11 function block not configured,

incorrect slot or incompatible firmware

Dark Flashin

Hardware fault

Flashi

Lit Switch in the STOP setting or ADM

The function of the LEDs is also described in the User Instructions

„Configuring the communications“.

6.2.1 Application information and noise immunity

• the module may only be used in forced-ventilated subracks.

• the serial connecting cables must be latched-in using the latching

mechanisms provided.

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“.

6.2.2 Connector assignment of the interfaces

25-pin sub D socket connector

Pin RS-232 TTY

1 Screen ----

2 TxD ----

3 RxD ----

7 Ground ----

9 ---- +RxD

10 ---- -RxD

18 ---- +TxD

21 ---- -TxD

Reset button

LED

Other information

Parameterizing

interface X5

Communications support modules

6-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

15-pin sub D socket connector

Pin Signal name Code

1 Collision ( screen ) CI-S

2 Collision ( + ) CI-A

3 Transmit data ( + ) DO-A

4 Receive data ( screen ) DI-S

5 Receive data ( + ) DI-A

6 Power supply ( - ) VC

7 Control signal ( + ) CO-A

8 Control signal ( screen ) CO-S

9 Collision ( - ) CI-B

10 Transmit data ( - ) DO-B

11 Transmit data ( screen ) DO-S

12 Receive data ( - ) DI-B

13 Power supply ( + ) VP

14 Power supply ( screen ) VS

15 Control signal ( - ) CO-B

Housing Overall screen PG

6.2.3 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.5 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 2,5 A

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 100 mA without connecting to a

SINEC H1 bus coupler

600 mA with connecting to a SINEC

H1 bus coupler

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V Max. 100 mA

SINEC H1 interface

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-15

Edition 12.2004

6.3 Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22

CS12: 6DD1660-0BC0

CS13: 6DD1660-0BB0

CS14: 6DD1660-0BA0

CS22: 6DD1660-0BD0

An extremely fast coupling can be established between as many subracks

as required via fiber-optic cable using the CS12 modules (or CS13, CS14)

and CS22.

A fiber-optic coupling consists of a master module, to which 1 to max. 8

slave modules can be connected. All of the master- and slave modules are

accommodated in a dedicated subrack.

The coupling practically represents an extension of the backplane bus,

whereby data transfer is realized via the RAM memory on the CS12. All of

the connected CS22 slave modules can access this; they all have the same

priority.

CS13 and CS14 consist of a CS12- and one or two ICS1 modules, which

have fiber-optic cable connections for up to 4 or 8 slaves.

• max. fiber-optic cable length of a point-to-point connection: 200 m

• data transfer time:

approx. 5 µs each 16-bit value for a L/C bus under normal load

conditions

max. approx. 32 µs per 16-bit value for an L/C bus under extremely high

load conditions

• 128 kbyte RAM memory on CS12

• a master module can transfer the following signals to the slave:

− basic sampling time (to synchronize the slave)

− alarm interrupt (to call an interrupt task)

− clock interrupt (to set the real-time clock)

• L- and C bus connections;

• not intended for use in the SR6(V), as data transfer is only realized via

the C bus

Order No.

Description

Features

Communications support modules

6-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.3.1 Slave connection

Depending on the master module type, 1 to 8 slaves (CS22) can be

connected:

Master module No. of slots No. of slaves

(CS22)

CS12 1 1

CS13

(consists of CS12 + ICS1)

2 1 to 4

CS14

(consists of CS12 + ICS1 + ICS1)

3 1 to 8

The following diagrams and tables illustrate the fiber-optic cable connections

to be connected for the possible master-slave configurations.

The interfaces are defined (fiber-optic cable connections) by appropriately

configuring in HWConfig.

For CS13 and CS14, the two fiber-optic cable connections on the basic

CS12 module are not used

Master module

CS12

Slave module

CS22

CS12 Type 1

X5 Trans. X6

X6 Rec. X5

Connecting 1 slave

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-17

Edition 12.2004

X5X6

CS22

X5X6

CS22

X5X6

CS22

X5X6

CS22

X6 X5

X8 X7

X10 X9

X12 X11

ICS1

CS13

( 1 )

( 2 )

( 3 )

( 4 )

Basic module

Master module

CS13

Slave module

CS22

CS12 ICS1 Type 1 2 3 4

X5 Not

X6 used

X5 Trans. X6

X6 Rec. X5

X7 Trans. X6

X8 Rec. X5

X9 Trans. X6

X10 Rec. X5

X11 Trans. X6

X12 Rec. X5

Connecting 4

slaves

Communications support modules

6-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

CS12

CS22

CS14

ICS1 ICS1

( 1 )

( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 2 )

( 7 )

( 8 )

Master module

CS14

Slave module

CS22

CS12 ICS1 ICS1 Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X5 Not

X6 used

X5 Trans. X6

X6 Rec. X5

X7 Trans. X6

X8 Rec. X5

X9 Trans. X6

X10 Rec. X5

X11 Trans. X6

X12 Rec. X5

X5 Trans. X6

X6 Rec. X5

X7 Trans. X6

X8 Rec. X5

X9 Trans. X6

X10 Rec. X5

X11 Trans. X6

X12 Rec. X5

In a subrack, several master modules as well as master- and slave modules

can be used together. Thus, branched or extremely large networks can be

created.

Connecting 8

slaves

Cascading

capability

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-19

Edition 12.2004

6.3.2 Supplementary components

The following fiber-optic cable is used for the coupling:

SINEC FIBER OPTIC CABLE standard cable,

assembled in pairs with 4 BFOC connectors

A detailed description of the fiber-optic cable is described in Catalog "SINEC

Industrial Communication Networks, IK 10".

Table 6-1 Fiber-optic cable Order No. and length code

6.3.3 Application information and noise immunity

• The CS1x, CS22 modules may only be used in a force-ventilated

subrack.

• The modules can only be used in SR12.x and SR24.x subracks (C bus

required).

• Before the power supply voltage of a subrack is switched-on (powered-

up), all of the plug connections of the fiber-optic cables involved must be

inserted.

In operation, the plug connectors of the fiber-optic cable coupling

may not be released.

• Master- and slave subracks can be powered-down while in operation

and powered-up again. The coupling is then re-established.

Fiber-optic cable

Order designation

6XV1 820-5B

Multiplier 0,1 m

1 m

10 m

100 m

Length code 0.

Communications support modules

6-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

• If a fiber-optic cable is not inserted, the transmit- and receive connections

must be protected using the appropriate caps

• As CS13, CS14 of the ICS1 partial modules do not have a connector at

the L/C bus, when required, Daisy Chain jumpers must be inserted (if

there is still a CPU module to the right)!

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data"

6.3.4 Technical data

No. of slots occupied CS12: 1

CS13: 2

CS14: 3

CS22: 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] CS12: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

CS13: 40.28 x 233.4 x 220

CS14: 60.42 x 233.4 x 220

CS22: 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight [kg] CS12: 0.5

CS13: 0.8

CS14: 1.1

CS22: 0.4

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V CS12: 1.8 A

CS13: 4.0 A

CS14: 5.5 A

CS22: 1.5 A

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V CS12: 50 mA

CS13: 100 mA

CS14: 150 mA

CS22: 150 mA

Other information

General data

Power supply

voltage

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-21

Edition 12.2004

6.4 SIMOLINK interface ITSL

6DD1663-0AB0

Using the ITSL expansion module, a connection is established to an

extremely fast, synchronous

SIMOLINK fiber-optic cable bus

The expansion module is inserted on a CPU module (PM5, PM6). A

maximum of 2 ITxx expansion modules can be inserted on a CPU module.

An ITxx occupies 1 slot (in addition to the CPU module slot).

• 2 plug connectors for an incoming and outgoing fiber-optic cable

6.4.1 Supplementary components

Fiber-optic cable

6.4.2 Mounting

The Itxx module is mounted outside the subrack on a PMx CPU module or is

inserted on an Itxx module already mounted on a PMx (using the 96-pin plug

connector on the module).

All of the modules must be bolted together using the distance pieces

provided (3 are provided)!

The first ITxx, located directly on a CPU module must be retained using the

metal distance pieces (these are included in the scope of supply of the

PMx). This establishes the electrical contact which is required to identify the

first expansion board.

The metal distance pieces are first retained on the PM4 using the M3

screws, washers and spring washers supplied.

If only one ITxx module is used, then it is screwed to the metal distance

elements using the M4 nuts provided (and washers).

If a second ITxx module is used, the first ITxx must be screwed using

plastic distance pieces (this is included in the scope of supply of the ITxx

modules).

The second ITxx module can then be inserted and retained using the M4

nuts provided (and washers).

The complete module assembly is then inserted in the subrack.

6.4.3 Application information and noise immunity

• operation without fan is possible

• noise-immune operation is only possible if the module is tightly screwed

into the subrack

Order No.

Description

Inputs and outputs

Distance pieces

For the first ITxx

For the second

ITxx

Communications support modules

6-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

6.4.4 Technical data

No. of slots 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight Approx. 0.6 kg

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 420 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 450 mA

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 175 mA

Other information

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-23

Edition 12.2004

6.5 Interface module SS1

6DD1688-1AA0

The SS4 communications module with SS1 interface module can be

equipped with a 20 mA line current interface.

The SS1 has, for the receiver and for the transmitter, a current source and

current drain, so that coupling partners without current sink can be

connected.

The interface module is a 40-pin (dual-in-line) hybrid circuit which is used in

the socket provided on the SS4 communications module.

When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses

of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the

socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.

• electrical isolation via optocoupler

• independent transmit- and receive channels

• 2 current sources

• 2 current sinks

• data transfer rate up to 38.4 kbaud

• max. cable length: 1000 m

In order to achieve data transfer with the highest possible noise immunity,

even at high baud rates and long cable lengths, we recommend that the

cables are connected, so that the current source (+Iq) and transmitter (+/-

TxD) are located at the same cable end.

In this case, the cable capacitance must only be charged with the diode

voltage (receiver). If the transmitter (transmit transistor) is located as current

source at the other cable end, the cable capacitance must be charged with

approximately the supply voltage.

Order No.

Description

Features

Recommended

connection

Communications support modules

6-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Please compare the following connection examples:

+Iq

+RxD

-RxD

-Iq

Cable

capacitance

+TxD

-TxD

+Iq

+RxD

-RxD

-Iq

Cable

capacitance

+TxD

-TxD

Fig. 6-5: Unfavorable cable connection:

Current source and transmitter at different ends

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-25

Edition 12.2004

+Iq +RxD

-RxD

-Iq

+TxD

-TxD

+Iq

+RxD

-RxD-Iq

+TxD

-TxD

Fig. 6-6: Recommended cable connection:

Current source and transmitter at the same end

Communications support modules

6-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.5.1 Pin assignment

Pin Significance Pin Significance

1 +15 V 21 GND

2 GND 22 GND

3 - 23 -

4 GND 24 -

5 -15 V 25 -

6 Not assigned 26 -

7 Not assigned 27 -T*D

8 Not assigned 28 -

9 Not assigned 29 Not assigned

10 T*D 30 Not assigned

11 NC 31 -Iq2

12 R*D 32 -

13 - 33 -

14 - 34 +T*D

15 -R*D 35 -

16 - 36 -

17 - 37 -Iq1

18 Not assigned 38 +Iq1

19 +Iq2 39 -

20 Not assigned 40 +R*D

Table 6-2 Pin assignment of the SS1 (dual inline, 40 pin)

6.5.2 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm

Weight 11 g

Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud

Max. cable length Max. 1000 m

+5 V Max. 95 mA

+15 V Max. 75 mA

-15 V Max. 75 mA

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-27

Edition 12.2004

6.6 Interface module SS2

6DD1688-1AB0

The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an

additional/extended RS 232 (V.24) interface using the SS2 interface

module.

The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be

inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communication module.

When inserting the sub-module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The

recesses of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point)

and the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.

• suitable for modem connection

• data transfer rates up to 38.4 kbaud

• max. cable length: 15 m

• external connections with V.28 signal level:

E2, D1, D2, S1.2, S2, M1, M2, M5, T1, T2, T4

6.6.1 Pin assignment

Pin Significance Pin Significance

1 +15 V 21 Ground

2 Ground 22 Ground

3 + 5 V 23 T4

4 Ground 24 M2

5 -15 V 25 NC

6 *DCD 26 M1

7 *CTS 27 NC

8 *RTS 28 E2

9 *DTR 29 S1.2

10 T*D 30 M5

11 *(TR*C) 31 -

12 R*D 32 -

13 *(RT*C) 33 Not assigned

14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned

15 Not assigned 35 Not assigned

16 D1 36 -

17 T2 37 T1

18 D2 38 -

19 Not assigned 39 -

20 S2 40 -

Order No.

Description

Features

Communications support modules

6-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.6.2 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 8.6 mm

Weight 11 g

Data transfer rate Max. 38.4 kbaud

Max. distance 15 m

+15 V Max. 75 mA

+5 V Max. 95 mA

-15 V Max. 75 mA

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-29

Edition 12.2004

6.7 Interface module SS31

6DD1688-1AC1

The SS4 communications module can be equipped with an RS 485

interface to establish a USS bus connection using the SS31 interface sub-

module.

The interface module is a 40 pin (dual-in-line) hybrid device which can be

inserted in the socket provided on the SS4 communications module.

When inserting the module, ensure that it is correctly aligned: The recesses

of the socket of the interface module (or pin 1, marked with a point) and the

socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.

• data transfer rate up to 1 Mbaud

• max. cable length dependent on the baud rate:

200 m at 1 Mbaud

• no terminating resistor

To enable the transmitter, the RTS signal must be set to „1“.

This enable signal is generated using an appropriate jumper in the

connector of the SS4 communications module.

6.7.1 Pin assignment

Pin No Function Pin No Function

1 Not assigned 21 0V

2 0V 22 0V

3 5V 23 -TxD

4 0V 24 +TxD

5 Not assigned 25 Not assigned

6 DCD 26 +RTxC

7 0V 27 -RTxC

8 RTS 28 +DCD

9 Not assigned 29 -DCD

10 TxD 30 +RxD

11 TRxC 31 -RxD

12 RxD 32 5V

13 RTxC 33 5V

14 Not assigned 34 Not assigned

15 -RTS 35 0V

16 +RTS 36 0V

17 -TRxC 37 Not assigned

18 +TRxC 38 Not assigned

19 Not assigned 39 Not assigned

20 Not assigned 40 Not assigned

Order No.

Description

Features

Enabling the

transmitter

Communications support modules

6-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Table 6-3 Pin assignment of SS31, dual-in-line version, 40 pin

6.7.2 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 50.8 x 18.6 x 9.0 mm

Weight Approx. 15 g

Data transfer rate Max. 1 Mbaud

Cable length Max. 200 m

Power supply voltage +5 V +/- 5%

Current drain, nominal value 90 mA

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-31

Edition 12.2004

6.8 Communications module SS4

6DD1688-0AD0

The following serial interfaces (data transfer protocols) can be

implemented using the SS4 communications module:

Protocol Application

DUST1 Connecting configuring- and operator control PCs,

e. g. to load the program mode and for start-up (commissioning)

DUST2 Connecting a message printer

DUST3 Connecting SIMATIC S5 (AS 512 or CP 525)

USS Connecting

• OP2 operator control panels

• VD1 text displays

• drive converters to the process coupling;

The SS4 is USS master and can be operated on the USS bus.

Max. baud rate: 187.5 kbaud

The communications module is a plug-in module for the CS7 support

module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and its

selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3

communication modules can be inserted on the CS7.

Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM

which is located on the CS7 support module.

The configurable SS4 interface has, as standard an RS 232 physical

interface to connect to the COM interfaces of a PC.

Other physical interfaces can be selected using an optional interface module

which can be inserted on the SS4:

Interface

module

Physical interface

(signal level along the cable)

Application

SS1 20 mA line current (TTY) Long data transfer lines;

interrupted lines can be reliably

identified

SS2 RS 232 („V.24“) For printers with control signals

(RTS, CTS)

SS31 RS 485 USS protocol

The maximum baud rate is 187.5 kbaud and is dependent on the associated

protocol software and if relevant, the interface modules used (refer under

interface modules).

6.8.1 Connecting programmers or PC

Connecting cables for PG740, PG750 or PG770 programmers can be

assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an appropriate parts set for

Order No.

Description

CS7

plug-in module

Physical interface

Communications support modules

6-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

the programmer side, according to the following drawing.

A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk).

Operating a PC or PG750/770 via the standard RS 232 (V.24) interface:

2514

SS4 PG750/770 ( COM 1, V24 )

Fig. 6-7 SS4 at a PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the RS 232 interface

(the two jumpers for the PC are not required!)

Operating the PG750/770 at the active SS4 communications module

(active: Line current source and -sink on the SS4 side; thus, higher data

integrity can be achieved with long cables and high baud rates):

2514

PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA )

passive

SS4 active

Fig. 6-8 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (active)

Operating the PG750/770 at the passive SS4 communications module

(passive: Line current source and -sink are not at the SS4 side):

2514

SS4 passive PG750/770 ( COM 1, 20mA ) active

Fig. 6-9 SS4 at PG750/770 ( COM1 ) via the 20mA interface (passive)

NOTE If the PG750/770 is operated as passive 20 mA current interface, then

switches S3/2 and S3/3 in the PG must be opened (refer to the

PG750/770 Manual).

RS 232

interface

20mA interface

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-33

Edition 12.2004

6.8.2 USS connection for OP2, VD1

Connecting cables for the OP2 operator control device or the VD1 numerical

display can be assembled using the SM8 parts set (for SS4) or an

appropriate parts set for OP2/VD1 (OP2: Parts set SM5) according to the

following diagrams.

A 4-core screened round cable is required (e. g. LICYC 4*0,5, Metrofunk).

In order to increase the data integrity, the bus cable at both ends (at the first

and last nodes) must be terminated using a resistor network:

• an 150Ω resistor between the RS485+, RS485- data signal lines

• one 390Ω resistor each from the data signal cables RS485+ to +5 V and

from RS485- to ground to define a quiescent signal level when a node is

not transmitting („basis network“)

For the VD1 numerical display, the bus termination (including basis

network) is already integrated in the unit. These can be activated using the

two DIL switches S1/S2.

RS485+

390R

150R

SS4

RS485-

S1 - ON

S2 - ON

VD1

OP2

390R

150R

Fig. 6-10 SS4 at OP2 and VD1; with bus terminating circuitry

Bus termination

USS bus with

connection

Communications support modules

6-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

390

150

RS485+

RS485-

Bus terminating resistor

+5V

Resistor to the

supply voltage

Resistor to the

signal reference

Fig. 6-11 RS 485 bus termination

390

150

RS485+

390

RS485-

USS busSS4

Fig. 6-12 Connector assignment SS4 with bus termination

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-35

Edition 12.2004

RS485+

Incoming

Outgoing

bus cable

RS485-

USS busSS4

Fig. 6-13 SS4 Connector assignment without bus termination (SS4 at the center of the bus

cable)

390

150

390

150

Screen

Data cable

Potential bonding

Housing ground

Grounding rail

Fig. 6-14 Screening and potential bonding of the data cable

USS bus cable

without circuitry

Communications support modules

6-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.8.3 Supplementary components

• SM8 connector parts set (26 pin, high-density plug connector)

• interface module:

A 40-pin dual inline socket X51 is provided in the communications

module. An interface module can be inserted in this socket in order to

implement an RS 485 (for USS) or 20mA interface instead of the existing

RS 232.

− interface module SS1 (20 mA)

− interface module SS2 (RS 232)

− interface module SS31 (RS 485)

When inserting the interface module, the mounting position must be

observed:

The recesses of the socket of the interface module (and pin 1, marked by

the point) and that of the socket on the SS4 (X51) must coincide.

6.8.4 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity

The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the

front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7.

The data transfer cable screen (bus cable) must be grounded to a grounding

rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable enters the

equipment. In addition, the screen must be connected to the housing in the

connector housing. The connector must be screwed to the communications

module.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

Front panel

grounding with

CS7

Cable

screen

Other information

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-37

Edition 12.2004

6.8.5 SS4 diagnostic functions

Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow

diagnostic of the associated communication module (operating and

fault/error conditions).

LEDs on CS7 Significance for SS4

Green

H10 / H20 / H30

Yellow

H11 / H21 / H31

Dark Dark Communications module not initialized

Flashing Flashing RAM test error

Flashing Dark Hardware of the communications

module is initialized;

wait for a connection to be established

to the initializing CPU module

Lit Dark DUST / USS initialized

Lit Lit Data transfer running

Dark Lit Software error

Table 6-4 Functions of the LEDs on CS7

An additional four LEDs for interface diagnostics is provided on the

communications module. However, when installed these LEDs are not

visible.

LED on SS4 Significance for SS4

H1 Dark / lit:

Flickers / glows:

Hex monitor not receiving

Hex monitor receiving data

H2 Dark / lit:

Flickers / glows:

Hex monitor not transmitting data

Hex monitor transmitting data

H3 Dark / lit:

Flickers / glows:

DUST/USS interface not transmitting

DUST/USS interface transmitting data

H4 Dark / lit:

Flickers / glows:

DUST/USS interface not receiving data

DUST/USS interface receiving data

Table 6-5 Functions of the LEDs on SS4

LED on CS7

LED on SS4

Communications support modules

6-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

The 26-pin interface connector X5 includes, in addition to the signals of the

configurable interface, also the signals of an RS 232 diagnostics interface

(„hexadecimal monitor“).

The required connecting cable, together with the cable of the configurable

interface must be connected at the interface connector to use this

diagnostics interface:

Pin Diagnostics interface X5 (RS-232)

1 TxD

9 GND

26 RxD

Fig. 6-15 Pin assignment of the diagnostics interface

SM8

Configured

interface

(DUST/USS) Connector for PC

(9-, 25 pin)

26-pin high density plug connector

to the SS4 interface module

Fig. 6-16 Connecting the configuring- and diagnostics interface at connector X5.

Diagnostics

interface X5

2514

SS4 Hex monitor (V.24)

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-39

Edition 12.2004

6.8.6 Connector assignment X5

Pin RS 232

standard

interface

RS 232

with SS2

20 mA

with SS1

RS 485

with SS31

2 TxD +RTS

3 RxD +TRxD

4 TxD

5 CTS RS485+

6 DCD +RTxC

7 GND +Iq2 +DCD

8 DCD +RxD

9 GND GND GND GND

10 +TxD

11 P15 P15 P15 P15

12 +Iq1

13 RTS +RxD

14 -RxD -RTS

15 RTxC -TRx

16 RxD

17 RTxC RS485-

18 GND GND GND GND

19 -TxD -RTxC

20 DTR -DCD

21 -Iq1 -RxD

22 P5 P5 P5 P5

23 P5 P5 P5 P5

24 TRxC -Iq2

25 N15 N15 N15 N15

Table 6-6 Pin assignment of connector X5

Communications support modules

6-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.8.7 Technical data

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 22 x 70 x 184

Weight: 0.2 kg

The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pole plug

connector X1 to CS7.

+5 V 0,4 A

+15 V 20 mA

-15V 20 mA

When calculating the total current drain of the communications module, the

current drain, if relevant, of the inserted interface module must be taken

into account.

General data

Power supply

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-41

Edition 12.2004

6.9 Communication modules SS5, SS52

SS5: 6DD1688-0AE0

SS52: 6DD1688-0AE2

SS5 SS52

Master interface for

PROFIBUS-FMS (SINEC L2-FMS),

FMS is a utility-oriented client/server

communications

• Master- or slave interface for

PROFIBUS-DP (SINEC L2-DP)

including the „shared input“, SYNC,

FREEZE functions

• MPI (multiple-point protocol; for

SIMATIC S7/M7)

The communications module is a module which is inserted into the CS7

support module. The CS7 support module, the communications module and

its selected receptacle are configured using HWConfig. A maximum of 3

communication modules can be inserted in each CS7.

Data is transferred with the CPU modules via a 16 kbyte dual port RAM,

which is located on the CS7 support module.

Connector X5 has the following interfaces:

• PROFIBUS interface with RS 485 format with electrical isolation

• 5V power supply for the Optical Link Modules OLM

with electrical isolation (floating)

• SS52: Parameterizing- and diagnostics interface with RS 232 format

(for COM PROFIBUS)

PROFIBUS is connected at connector X5:

• directly with the SINEC L2 bus connector

• via an SINEC L2 bus terminal;

in this case, the drop cable capacitance must be taken into account

depending on the baud rate

The SINEC L2 bus terminal as well as the SINEC L2 bus connector have

terminating resistors which can be switched-in.

Order No.

Description

Plug-in CS7

module

Interfaces

PROFIBUS

connection

Communications support modules

6-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

6.9.1 Supplementary components

• SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 1.5 m connecting cable

• SINEC L2 bus terminal RS 485, 3 m connecting cable

• SINEC L2 bus connector RS 485

• SINEC L2 optical bus terminals PF/SF

Example of a cable:

Designation Order No.

connecting cable (Profibus) 6XV1 830-0AH10

bus connector 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0

For further information, refer to:

− SINEC Catalog IK10

− SIMATIC S5/S7 Catalog

− Equipment Manual "SIMATIC S5 ET200 distributed peripheral

system"

A COM database must be generated and loaded in the SS5 using the

COMSS5 program so that the SS5 can be used.

COMSS5 can run on

− PG programmers under S5-DOS, or

− PC with S5-DOS emulation or COM adapter

The database is, for example, loaded into the SS5 via PROFIBUS using the

CP5412 PC plug-in card (PCMCIA).

To operate the SS52 as master, a COM database must be generated, using

the COM PROFIBUS (or COM ET200) program, and loaded into the SS52.

The program runs on a PC under Windows.

The database is loaded into the SS52 via

• PROFIBUS

(with PC PROFIBUS card CP5411, CP5511 or

MPI card or interface)

• COM1/2 interface of the PC and RS 232 parameterizing/diagnostics

interface of the SS52 with „SS52load“ driver program.

COM PROFIBUS must also be ordered if SS52 is configured as master:

Order No.: 6ES5 895-6SE12 (German)

The driver program SS52load is included in COM PROFIBUS from V3.1 or

can be obtained at no charge from Siemens via the Intranet:

ftp://www.erlf80.asi.siemens.de/SIMADYN_D/html/treiber.htm

Bus connection

SS5

parameterization

SS52

parameterization

Drive program

„SS52load“

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-43

Edition 12.2004

We are preparing an Internet page for SIMADYN D.

6.9.2 Mounting guidelines and noise immunity

The front panel of the communications module must be connected to the

front panel of the CS7 using the cables provided with the CS7.

The screen of the data transfer cable (bus cable) must be grounded to a

grounding rail through the largest possible surface area where the cable

enters the equipment.

In addition, the screen in the connector housing must be connected to the

housing. The connector must be tightly screwed to the communications

module.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

6.9.3 Diagnostics LED

Each receptacle of the CS7 support module has 2 LEDs, which allow

diagnostics of the associated communications module (operating- and

error/fault conditions).

LEDs on CS7 Significance for SS5

Green

H10 / H20 / H30

Yellow

H11 / H21 / H31

Dark Dark Processor not initialized

Dark Lit Without database at the bus;

COMSS5 must be parameterized

Dark Flickers No database, with bus activity;

COMSS5 must be parameterized

Slow

flash

Dark Initialization erroneous;

COMSS5 database erroneous

Fast

flash

Dark Initialization phase 1

Lit Dark Initialization phase 2

Lit Lit Correctly connected at the bus; presently

no bus activity

Lit Flickers Bus activity

LED Green

H10 / H20 / H30

Yellow

H11 / H21 / H31

Dark CPU stopped No bus operation (initialization

phase)

Flashing, 5 Hz Fatal error:

Read-out the error codes at

Error on the bus,

e. g. short-circuit:

Grounding the

front panel with

CS7

Cable

screening

Other information

CS7 LED for SS5

CS7 LED for SS52

Communications support modules

6-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

function block @CSPRO and

contact the SIMADYN

Hotline

Check the bus cable and other

bus nodes

Flashing, 1 Hz Initialize the connection to

the associated CPU module

(@CSPRO);

check @CSPRO configuring;

COM database not available

or inactive (during download)

Flashing, 0.5

- CFC- and COM configuring do

not match;

bus operation possible with

some restrictions

Lit Initialization O.K. Bus operation O.K.

Additional LEDs are available on SS5/SS52; however, they are only visible

when the module is inserted in an adapter card:

LEDs on SS5 Significance for SS5

D1 No function

D2 No function

D3 Off / on:

Flickers / glows:

Not transmitting;

PROFIBUS interface transmitting data

D4 Off / on:

Flickers / glows:

Not receiving;

PROFIBUS interface receiving data

LEDs SS52 Significance for SS52

H1 On PROFIBUS interface operational

Off PROFIBUS interface not operational

6.9.4 Connector assignment X5

PIN Designation Function

LED on SS5

LED on SS52

SS5:

Communications support modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 6-45

Edition 12.2004

PIN Designation Function

1 - -

2 - -

3 RS485 + Receive- and transmit signal + (corresponding to data

4 RTS Request to send

5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs

6 P5EXT 5V external; to supply OLMs

7 - -

8 RS485 - Receive- and transmit signal - (corresponding to data

9 RTS Request to send

Table 6-7 SS5: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5

Communications support modules

6-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 12.2004

Pin Designation Explanation

1 RS 232:

Ground

For „SS52load“; (for SS52 from edition, approx. 7.97!)

2 RS 232: TxD For „SS52load“: Transmit signal

3 RS485 + PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal +

(corresponding to data B)

4 RTS Request to send

(to drive an OLM; „1“ when transmitting; as for pin 9)

5 M5EXT External ground; to supply OLMs

6 P5EXT External P5; to supply OLMs

7 RS 232: RxD For „SS52load“: Receive signal

8 RS485 - PROFIBUS: Receive- and transmit signal -

(corresponding to data A)

9 RTS Request to send

(to drive the OLM; „1“ when transmitting; as for pin 4)

Table 6-8 SS52: Pin assignment of the 9-pin SUB D socket connector X5

6.9.5 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 70 x 184 x 22 mm

Weight 0.2 kg

The power supply (+5V, +15V and -15V) is established via the 48-pin plug

connector X1 to CS7.

+5 V SS5: max. 0,4 A

SS52: max. 0,7 A

+15 V max. 10 mA

-15 V max. 10 mA

SS52:

General data

Power supply

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-1

Edition 03.2001

7 Technology subrack

7.1 Technology subrack SRT400 7-2

7.2 Technology module T400 7-2

Overview

Technology subrack

7-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

7.1 Technology subrack SRT400

6DD1682-0CG0

The subrack SRT400 has 2 slots to accept

• 1 or 2 technology modules T400

• SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES communication modules

− CB1 (PROFIBUS-DP)

− CB2 (CAN)

− SCB1 (binary and analog inputs/outputs connected to SCI1/2 via fiber-

optic cable)

− SCB2 (USS, Peer-to-Peer)

• input voltage: 115 / 230 V

• output voltage:

− + 5 V, +/- 15 V for modules

− 24 V DC for binary inputs/outputs

• metal housing, closed at all sides

• wall mounting

7.2 Technology module T400

7.2.1 General features

6DD1606-0AD0

The technology module T400 has a range of comprehensive peripheral

functions (inputs/outputs) on the module. This allows it to be used by itself to

realize favorably-priced smaller applications for drives and controls. It

represents an innovated T300.

As far as the backplane bus and module format, it is designed as option

module for use in the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71 (FC, SC)

drive converters.

A high-performance coupling to the basic control module of MASTER

DRIVES („BASE BOARD“ CU) is established via its dual port RAM.

Further it can also be used in the SRT400 subrack(„Technology Box“).

Here, it can be used together with a second T400 or a MASTER DRIVES

communications module („COM BOARD“).

It is configured on a Windows 95-PC with SIMATIC STEP7 (HWConfig) and

CFC.

Order No.

Description

Features

Order No.

Description

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-3

Edition 03.2001

• 2 analog outputs

• 5 analog inputs

• 2 binary outputs

• 4 bi-directional binary inputs/outputs

• 8 binary inputs, of which a maximum of 4 can be used to call-up interrupt

tasks

• 2 incremental encoder connections with zero pulse

• 2 coarse pulse connections to suppress zero pulses;

rough pulses can be optionally used as binary input

• 2 absolute value encoder connections (SSI/EnDat interface);

absolute value encoder connection 2, optionally to serial interface 2!

• Serial interface 1 for

− download and service with DUST1 protocol(RS 232) or

− USS protocol (RS 485)

• Serial interface 2 (RS 485), optionally to absolute value encoder

connection 2 for

USS (master or slave) or peer-to-peer

• The module is configured by downloading data into the permanently

inserted flash EPROM (the EPROM is soldered-in)

• MASTER DRIVES operator control panel OP1S and SIMOVIS can be

connected via USS slave for parameterization (for applications without

MASTER DRIVES BASE-BOARD (CU), e. g. in the SRT400)

• 2*T400 can be used in the SRT400 subrack

• Selectable T400 synchronizing from the BASE- or COM BOARD,

synchronizing signals can be output to the BASE- and COM BOARD;

• Dual port RAM interface to MASTER DRIVES

BASE BOARD, CU and

interface to the dual port RAM on a communications module (COM

BOARD CB)

• 32-bit RISC processor, 32 MHz

• 2Mbyte Flash for compressed program code.

• 4Mbyte DRAM for the de-compressed (unzipped) program which can be

run

• 32 kbyte permanent change memory (EEPROM)

(e.g. for fuzzy control)

• 4 kbyte dual port RAM

Inputs/outputs

Functional features

Features,

electronics

Technology subrack

7-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

A socket for a 28 pin EPLD device (ALTERA) is provided on the module for

copy-protecting the user program („Hardlock-PAL“).

Using a special function block, this EPLD block can be checked and the

program execution stopped if it has the incorrect code or no code.

Further information on request.

7.2.2 Mechanical design, terminals

• The T400 can be used at slot 2 in the MASTER DRIVES electronics box

(outer right!). The PROFIBUS-DP interface (CB1) or CAN bus (CB2) can

be used at slot 3.

The connection to the baseboard at slot 1 and to the expansion board

("COMBOARD") at slot 3 is established via two 64-pin plug connectors.

• The PC board is 100 mm * 233.35 mm. The maximum component height

above the PC board is 14 mm.

• All of the input and output terminals are located at the front of the

module. MINI-COMBICON plug connectors from the Phönix company are

used.

• 55 terminals (five blocks of 11) are located at the foremost edge of the

module.

• Several terminals are assigned twice as a result of the restricted space.

The actual function is selected using a switch or is configured.

• Operation without fan is possible for a 55°C ambient temperature!.

• The backplane bus wiring in the SRT400 technology box is designed so

that two T400 can be used. In this case, connector X2 (below) of the

lefthand slot is connected with connector X1 (top) of the righthand slot.

7.2.3 Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation

• 2 incremental encoder inputs, with tracks A, B, and zero pulse of which

− encoder 1 for HTL signal level

− encoder 2 for either HTL or differential signals (RS422);

• The pulses for encoder 1 (tracks A, B, zero pulse) can be optionally

retrieved from the BASE BOARD via the backplane bus („incremental

encoder simulation“ of the CUx; as TTL signal level).

The pulse source is selected by configuring the speed actual value block

NAV.

• Max. input frequency 1MHz

• Selectable, direction of rotation-dependent evaluation of the zero pulses

Software

protection

Incremental

encoder

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-5

Edition 03.2001

A coarse/fine (zero) pulse evaluation is provided to suppress noise- or

bounce pulses for synchronous- and positioning tasks.

The coarse pulse enables a window for the fine pulse. Generally, coarse-

and fine pulse are defined by the mechanical design of the machine

(e.g. cams). The smoothing time of the coarse pulse input is approx. 1 ms

(as for binary inputs). The fine pulse has no smoothing time.

A differentiation is made between the following situations when evaluating

the coarse- and fine pulses:

The evaluation signal is generated, if...

Case

A fine pulse is received; the coarse pulse is not taken into

account; (also for disturbances/noise on the fine pulse)

Case

Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level, however only 1

evaluation signal per coarse pulse (fine faults/noise are

suppressed)

Case

Coarse- and fine pulse have an H signal level,

fine pulse noise is not suppressed.

Case

After deleting the coarse pulse, a positive fine pulse edge was

identified.

Additional fine pulses (noise) are suppressed!

Case

Coarse pulse is inactive (L signal level) and fine pulses are

active (H signal level),

the fine pulse noise is not suppressed!

Case 1 Case 2 Case 4 Case 5

Coarse pulse

Fine pulse

Evaluation signal

Case 3

Fig. 7-1 Coarse- and fine-pulse evaluation

7.2.3.1 Pulse encoder 2

Pulse encoders with different signal levels can be connected at encoder

input 2:

• RS422

• HTL± (± 3V)

• HTL (3V ... 8V)

Coarse / fine pulse

evaluation

Technology subrack

7-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

• TTL (0V ... 5V)

The setting is made using the DIL switches S2/1 - S2/8

23456781

Fig. 7-2 Switch S2

Track signals A and B are set according to the following table:

Significance Switch S2 Setting Significance Switch S2 Setting

TTL RS422 1 ON TTL (0V ... 5V) 1 ON

2 ON 2 ON

3 ON 3 OFF

HTL± (±3V) 1 OFF HTL (3V ... 8V) 1 OFF

2 OFF 2 OFF

3 OFF 3 OFF

The zero impulse can be switched indepenent from Track A or B:

TTL RS422 4 ON TTL (0V ... 5V) 4 ON

5 ON 5 OFF

HTL± (±3V) 4 OFF HTL (3V ...8V) 1 OFF

5 ON 2 OFF

For differential signals, bus terminating resistors can be switched-in via

switch S2/6 - 8:

Significance Switch S2

Track A 6

Track B 7

Zero pulse 8

The terminating resistors are switched-out in the OFF setting; they are

switched-in in the ON setting.

The switches can only be changed when the module has been withdrawn.

The switches are not accessible when the module is inserted.

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-7

Edition 03.2001

7.2.4 Absolute value encoders

The T400 has up to 2 synchronous-serial interfaces for multi-turn absolute

value encoders:

• SSI- and EnDat protocol (according to the Heidenhain company)

• Selectable cycle between 100 kHz and 2 MHz

• Either dual- or Gray-, or Gray-excess code can be selected

However, terminals 72 - 75 can only be alternatively used as

− second synchronous-serial interface ("absolute value encoder 2") or

− peer-to-peer or USS protocol

It is possible to simultaneously use, for example, peer-to-peer and "absolute

value encoder 1" (terminals 76-79).

7.2.5 Serial interfaces

T400 has 2 serial interfaces:

The following is realized via interface 1,

• the program is downloaded

• service („CFC in the test mode", "basic service") for start-up

(DUST1 protocol).

Baud rate: 19.2 kbaud

Optionally, the USS protocol (master/slave), to connect a MASTER

DRIVES OP1S operator control unit or SIMOVIS can be set per hardware

switch on the T400.

Interface 1 has both physical interfaces (can be optionally used!):

• RS 232 for PC coupling (download, service)

• RS 485 (2 wire) e.g. for USS to the operator control panel

connection (OPx, SIMOVIS) or to higher-level

(master) systems (SIMATIC); incl. terminating

resistors which can be switched-in

Interface 2 is a mix asynchronous and synchronous interface with RS 485

data transfer signal level:

• Peer-to-peer

with full duplex, 4-wire connection

• USS protocol (master/slave)

with half-duplex, 2-wire connection

The following baud rates can be set:

„Service“

interface 1

Interface 2

Technology subrack

7-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

9.6 kbaud

19.2 kbaud

38.4 kbaud

93.75 kbaud

187.5 kbaud

7.2.5.1 Bus termination

Bus terminating resistors for serial interfaces 1- and 2 can be switched-in via

switch S1/1-S1/8 if the T400 is located at the beginning or end of the bus.

Terminals Switch S1

Serial interface 1 70/71 1,2

Serial interface 2

(2-conductor, 4-

conductor)

74/75 3,4

Serial interface 2

(4-conductor)

72/73 5,6

23456781

Fig. 7-3 Switch S1

The terminating resistors are switched-in in the ON setting.

The switch settings can only be changed after the module has been

withdrawn. These switches are not accessible if the module is inserted.

Switch S7 has no function.

7.2.5.2 Communications switch

Switch S1/8 toggles between the service- and USS protocol at serial

interface 1. More detailed information can be taken from the description of

the USS protocol.

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-9

Edition 03.2001

7.2.6 Synchronizing possibilities

The T400 offers various ways to process and transfer synchronizing signals.

The processing possibilities are listed in the following diagram. The three

selector switches indicated, are set by appropriate configuring.

T0GATE

Port A/4

Com board

X2 / A26

Base board

X1 / A26

L_INT_DPR_PT

Port A/5

L_INT_DPR_CU

L_INT_CU_DPR

Com board

X2 / B25

Base board

X1 / B25

L_INT_PT_DPR

T0OUT

SYNC_COM

SYNC_BASE

Inputs

Outputs

Steer

Processor

Fig. 7-4 Synchronizing possibilities

The basic cycle of the T400 can be taken from three various sources (can

be configured in HWConfig):

• Basic cycle time of the T400 (standard)

• Synchronizing signal of the BASE BOARDs (L_INT_CU_DPR (connector

X1/B25) for T0GATE)

• Synchronizing signal of the COM BOARDs (L_INT_DPR_PT (connector

X2/A26) for T0GATE)

Thus, a cycle from the CBX can synchronize the T400 and BASE BOARD

(CU).

Configurable interrupt tasks can also be called using the synchronizing

signals from BASE- or COM BOARDs (ports A/4, A/5).

The T400 can supply BASE- and COM BOARD synchronizing signals, which

come from the following three sources and can be selected by appropriately

configuring:

• Basic cycle time of the T400 (T0OUT of MFB1)

• Directly connecting synchronizing signals from the BASE- or COM

BOARD to the other module

• In an FP with a special FB-generated synchronizing signal

(SYNC_BASE, SYNC_COM)

Synchronizing

possibilities

Sync signals for

BASE- and

COM BOARD

Technology subrack

7-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

BASE BOARD-T400, synchronized via X2/B25 --> X1/B25 TECH BOARD-

T400, and

TECH BOARD-T400 synchronized via X1/A26 --> X2/A26 BASE BOARD-

T400;

7.2.7 Parameters

The I/O of the function blocks as well as the parameters can be defined

(configured) on the T400. Thus, these I/O can be read and changed using

the "parameter mechanism" via

• Dual port RAM

• PROFIBUS (CB1)

• USS protocol (for operator control device, SIMOVIS)

2000 parameters can be configured, whereby a differentiation can be made

between those at the operator control panel (and SIMOVIS), and the basic

drive converter parameters („r“ and „P“) using one of the two prefixes

• „H“

• „L“

7.2.8 Terminal assignment

All of the signals are connected at 55 terminals, which are accessible from

the front.

They are distributed over 5 11-pin MINI-COMBICON plug connectors in a

3.5 mm grid dimension (connectors X5 - X9):

Synchronizing

2 T400:

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-11

Edition 03.2001

T400 terminal assignment Con. Con.-pin Terminal

+ 24 V external (for binary inputs and outputs) X5 1 45

Bi-directional binary input and output 1 2 46

Bi-directional binary input and output 2 3 47

Bi-directional binary input and output 3 4 48

Bi-directional binary input and output 4 5 49

Ground, binary inputs and outputs 6 50

Binary output 1 7 51

Binary output 2 8 52

Binary input 1 (interrupt-capable) 9 53

Binary input 2 (interrupt-capable) 10 54

Binary input 3 (interrupt-capable) 11 55

Binary input 4 (interrupt-capable) X6 1 56

Binary input 5 2 57

Binary input 6 3 58

Binary input 7 4 59

Binary input 8 5 60

Ground, binary inputs and outputs 6 61

Encoder 2 : Track A ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track A+ ( RS422) 7 62

Encoder 2: Track B ( HTL) Encoder 2: Track B+ ( RS422) 8 63

Encoder 2: Zero pulse (HTL) Encoder 2: Zero pulse +

(RS422)

9 64

Encoder 2: Coarse pulse 10 65

Encoder 2 ground 11 66

Serial interface 1: Rx-RS232 X7 1 67

Serial interface 1: Tx-RS232 2 68

Serial interface ground 3 69

Serial interface . 1: Tx/Rx-RS485+ 4 70

Serial interface 1: Tx/Rx-RS485- 5 71

Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Data+ 6 72

Serial interface 2: Rx-RS485- Absolut-Encoder 2: Data- 7 73

Serial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485+ Absolut-Encoder 2: Pulse+ 8 74

Serial interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485- Absolut-Encoder 2: Pulse- 9 75

Absolut-Encoder 1: Data+ 10 76

Absolut-Encoder 1: Data- 11 77

Absolut-Encoder 1: Pulse+ X8 1 78

Absolut-Encoder 1: Pulse- 2 79

+ 15 V -Encoder Power Supply (max. 100 mA) 3 80

Increm.-Encoder 1: Track A 4 81

Increm.-Encoder 1: Track B 5 82

Increm.-Encoder 1: Zero pulse 6 83

Increm.-Encoder 1: Coarse pulse 7 84

Increm.-Encoder 1 Ground 8 85

Increm.-Encoder 2: Track A- (with RS422) 9 86

Increm.-Encoder 2: Track B- (with RS422) 10 87

Increm.-Encoder 2: Zero pulse- (with RS422) 11 88

Ground, analog inputs and outputs X9 1 89

Analog input 1 Analog input 1+ 2 90

Analog input 1- 3 91

Analog input 2 Analog input 2+ 4 92

Analog input 2- 5 93

Analog input 3 6 94

Analog input 4 7 95

Analog input 5 8 96

Analog input 1 9 97

Technology subrack

7-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Analog input 2 10 98

Ground, analog inputs and outputs 11 99

All grounds are connected mutually via inductivity and with electronics

ground.

The grounds connections of

 interfaces 1 and 2

 analog inputs/outputs

 binary inputs/outputs.

 incremental encoders 1 and 2

are connected to the T400 electronics ground through 0 Ohm resistors,

reactors and capacitors which can be soldered-out. For production-related

reasons, the 0 Ohm resistor is an SMD device (not separately connected)

and when required must be soldered-out (to interrupt the electrical

connection)!

7.2.9 Technical data

No. of slots occupied 1

Dimensions W x H x D [mm] 20.14 x 233.4 x 220

Weight approx. 0.6 kg

The T400 requires the following voltages at the upper backplane bus

connector X1:

Rated voltage min. max. Typ. current drain

+5 V +4.75 V +5.25 V 1000 mA

+15 V +14.4 V +15.6 V 140 mA + encoder load

(max. 100 mA, electronically limited)

-15 V -15.6 V -14.4 V 140 mA

24 V (external) 20 V 30 V 150 mA + binary output current

Note:

Grounding

General data

Power supply

Technology subrack

Hardware - SIMADYN D 7-13

Edition 03.2001

No. 5

Type Of which, 2 are differential inputs,

3 unipolar;

non-floating

Input voltage range -10 V +/- 4 LSB to +10 V +/- 4 LSB

(1 LSB = 4.88 mV)

Input resistance 20 kOhm

Input filter 3 dB transition frequency: 1.5 kHz

Resolution 12 bits

Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature

range

Linearity + 1 LSB

Offset error + 3 LSB

Max. conversion time 15 µs

Differential input resistance > 20 kOhm

Hardware smoothing 5 µs

No. 2

Output voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Output current +/- 10 mA

Resolution 12 bits

Monotony 11 bits over the complete temperature range

Absolute accuracy Typ. 10 bits over the complete temperature

range

Short-circuit protection to

ground

Yes

Slew rate of the output Approx. 3.4 V/µs

Offset- and amplification

error (gain error)

+ 3 LSB

No. 10 and max. 4 bi-directional non-floating

Input voltage 24 V DC nominal voltage

for 0 signal -1 V to +6 V or inputs open-circuit

for 1 signal +13 V to +33 V

Input current

for 0 signal 0 mA

for 1 signal 8 mA typ.

Input smoothing 500 µs

Analog inputs

Analog outputs

Binary inputs

Technology subrack

7-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

No. 2 and

max. 4 bi-directional;

non-floating

Power supply voltage From external

nominal value 24 V DC

perm. range +20 V to 30 V including ripple

briefly +35 V, max. 0.5 s

Output current for 1 signal

nominal current 50 mA (also corresponds to max. value)

Short-circuit protection Electronic and thermal

Limiting inductive switch-off

voltages

Supply voltage + 1 V

Residual current 20 µA for 0 signal

Signal level

for 0 signal Max. 3 V

for 1 signal Supply voltage - 2.5 V

Switching delay Max. 15 µs

No. of encoders Total max. 2

Type Differential inputs, electrical isolation (floating)

(optocoupler)

Input voltage range Differential voltage -30 V to +30 V

Input voltage (for 15 mA load)

for 0 signal -30 V to +4 V

for 1 signal +8 V to + 30 V

Input current Approx. 15 mA (electronically limited)

Pulse frequency Max.. 1 MHz (track frequency)

Phase difference of the track

signals

Independent of the pulse frequency at least 200

Input filter Can be configured via software (function block)

Binary outputs

15 V incremental

encoder

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-1

Edition 04.2011

8 Program memory modules / Interface modules

8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52 8-2

8.2 Interface module SE13.1 8-4

8.3 Interface module SE26.1 8-7

8.4 Interface module SB10 8-11

8.5 Interface module SB60 8-17

8.6 Interface module SB61 8-22

8.7 Interface module SB70 8-29

8.8 Interface module SB71 8-35

8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13 8-41

Overview

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.1 Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52

MS5: 6DD1610-0AH0

MS51: 6DD1610-0AK0

MS52: 6DD1610-0AH2

The MS5, MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are used to save

the processor program, configured by the user with HWConfig and CFC

(including the operating system).

The program memory module is inserted in the module receptacle of the

CPU module provided and the user program can be downloaded in two

ways:

• via a PCMCIA card, integrated in the PC (offline loading) (PC card)

• directly from the PC via a serial communications link into the memory

module inserted in the CPU module

(online loading)

The size of the software to be loaded into the memory module ("zipped"

to approximately 50%), and the size of the available program memory in

the CFC is displayed under the following memory item:

Target system / load / info

The differences in the application and the memory expansion of the MS5,

MS51 and MS52 program memory modules are shown in the following

table:

Application MS5 MS51 MS52

Flash memory to store the configuring

software

2 Mbyte 4 Mbyte 8 Mbyte

EEPROM for operating parameters which

can be changed

8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte 8 Kbyte

Table 8-1 Application areas of the program memory modules

NOTE The flash memory is a non-volatile memory which can be electrically

programmed and erased.

PCMCIA and JEIDA

industry standard

68 pin memory card

Write

protect

switch

Order Nos.

Description

Installation /

programming

Program size

Memory overview

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-3

Edition 04.2011

8.1.1 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 54 x 85.6 x 3.3 mm

Weight 30 g

MS5 MS51 MS52

Power supply +5 V +5 V +5 V

Current drain 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA

Connection to JEIDA/PCMCIA 68 Pin

Access time 200 ns

General data

Power supply

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.2 Interface module SE13.1

6DD1681-0BD1

The interface module is used to adapt passive signals via voltage divider

and T elements. It includes

• 6 T elements which can be connected/configured using solder pins,

and

• 2 voltage dividers which can be freely configured

• housing for snapping-on to mounting rail

• 3-row, 3 x 16-pin terminal block

• 6 configurable T elements

• 2 voltage dividers with spindle potentiometers which can be freely

dimensioned

• solder pins to connect components with axially-located connections

• labeling field for the user to identify his plant/system

ZE ZA

Input Outpu

GND

Screen

Fig. 8-1 Connecting the T element on the interface module

Order No.

Description

Module design

T element

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-5

Edition 04.2011

Eingang 1

Ausgang

R-1 R-2

2K2

Eingang 2

Schirm

Fig. 8-2 Wiring the voltage divider on the interface module

8.2.1 Application information

The circuits on the interface module are defined by the user. Here are

some of the examples of the circuits which can be implemented:

• filters:

− low-pass

− high-pass

− bandpass

− bandstop

− RC element

• voltage divider

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

8.2.2 Technical data

Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 77 x 112.5 x 72.5 mm

Weight 0.23 kg

Voltage divider, nominal value 1.76 to 2.64 kΩ

Power supply Max. +33 V DC

Current drain Max. 15 mA

Maximum rating 500 mW

Voltage divider

Other information

General data

Power supply

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.2.3 Connector assignment X1

Terminal Designation Terminal Designation Terminal Designation

1 Input volt. divider 1 21 GND volt. divider 1 41 Screen volt. divider 1

2 Output " 22 " 42 "

3 Input volt. divider 2 23 GND volt. divider 2 43 Screen volt. divider 2

4 Output " 24 " 44 "

5 Input channel 1 25 GND channel 1 45 Screen channel 1

6 Output " 26 " 46 "

7 Input channel 2 27 GND channel 2 47 Screen channel 2

8 Output " 28 " 48 "

9 Input channel 3 29 GND channel 3 49 Screen channel 3

10 Output " 30 " 50 "

11 Input channel 4 31 GND channel 4 51 Screen channel 4

12 Output " 32 " 52 "

13 Input channel 5 33 GND channel 5 53 Screen channel 5

14 Output " 34 " 54 "

15 Input channel 6 35 GND channel 6 55 Screen channel 6

16 Output " 36 " 56 "

Table 8-2 Connector assignment of X1

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-7

Edition 04.2011

8.3 Interface module SE26.1

6DD1681-0CG1

The module is used to convert analog signal quantities and provide

electrical isolation (floating). The module filters analog signals using a

low-pass filter.

• housing for snapping-on to mounting rails

• differential input

• short-circuit proof output

• operating message via LED

• labeling field for module identification

The module is supplied with 24 V DC. A DC/DC converter generates

electrically isolated +/-15 V DC voltages from this 24 V DC supply. These

supply the isolating- and signal amplifiers at the input. The 24 V DC

power supply and the analog output are electrically connected.

A second order Butterworth low pass filter filters the applied signal. The

frequency characteristics and the transfer characteristics are specified in

Chapter 1.6.

A differential amplifier is used as the input circuitry. Thus, parallel

voltage- or serial current measurements are possible. This allows analog

signals of the plant/system to be processed in electrically-isolated

(floating) SIMADYN D subracks.

Order No.

Description

Module design

Features

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.3.1 Application information

The module has screw terminals to connect the input- and output signals.

SIMADYN D is connected via an SU10, SU11 interface module which is

connected to an input/output module (EA12) or an expansion module

(IT41) using a ribbon cable.

Fig. 8-3 Connecting example for the interface module SE26.1

Example

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-9

Edition 04.2011

8.3.2 Technical data

Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 135 x 77 x 59

Weight 0.2 kg

External power supply +24 V DC

Range +20 to +30 V DC

Briefly (t<500 ms) 1,5 x Vrated

Current drain at 24 V 170 mA at the rated output current

Signal level

input +/- 10 V

output +/- 10 V

Input resistance 100 kΩ

Signal level +10 V

Output load resistor >1 kOhm

Zero point error 1) + 2 mV

Maximum error +10 mV

Push-pull output 5 mA

Transfer frequency range:

0 to 1 kHz ⏐A/AO⏐ = 0 dB

1 to 3 kHz ⏐A/AO⏐ ε 3 dB

1) 25 °C ambient temperature

8.3.3 Connector assignment

Terminal block -X2 Terminal block -X3

Terminal Designation Terminal Designation

031 Pos. input signal 04 Output signal

032 Neg. input signal 05 Output ground

05 Input ground L+ P24 power supply Pext

1S Push-pull output 1S Connected with terminal

X2/3S

2S Terminal connected with

X2/05 input ground

2S Connected with terminal

X3/05

3S Connected with X3/1S M M24 power supply Mext

Table 8-3 Connections of terminal blocks X2 and X3

General data

Power supply

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.3.4 Diagram

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Fig. 8-4 Voltage- and frequency characteristic of interface module SE26.1

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-11

Edition 04.2011

8.4 Interface module SB10

6DD1681-0AE2

The interface module outputs binary signals from SIMADYN D /

SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components to the plant/system or

receives binary signals from the plant/system and transfers these to

SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components. The

connection to SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458-

components is established through ribbon cables and on the

plant/system side, via terminals. There is no electrical isolation between

the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components side and

the plant/system side.

• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails

• ribbon cable connector (X1):

− 8 pins for binary signals, 24 V DC

− 2 pins for 1P, 1M power supply voltages

• connector (X2), 2x 8 pin:

− 8 terminals for 24 V DC binary signals

− 8 terminals for the reference point (1M, 1P is also possible)

• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P and 1M

• double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G)

• diagnostic LEDs

The power supply on the SIMADYN D side is fed-in at terminal X3:

Terminal X3 Voltage at the SIMADYN D side

+24 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory

SM11 power supply connector for interface modules

(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter

“Installation and EMC guideline”.

The SIMADYN-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).

The SIMADYN-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault

condition).

Order No.

Description

Module design

Power supply on

the SIMADYN D

side

Green LED

Red LED

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

Voltages 1P and 1M can be used, via the double test socket (G; +) to

simulate an input signal for SIMADYN D.

Double test socket X5 Voltage

+ (1P from X3)

G (1M from X3)

+24 V

0 V

WARNUNG Explosion Hazard

No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be

non-hazardous.

8.4.1 Signals

Each status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED (1...8).

There is a screw connection for each signal at the two terminal strips X2:

• terminals 1 to 8 for binary signals

• terminals 51 to 58 for reference points

The reference points of the signals are either at 1M potential or 1P

potential. The polarity is selected on the module using a solder link:

51..58

Fig. 8-5 Solder link to set the signal reference points

NOTE Link 1M-1W is inserted in the factory

Test socket

Yellow LED

Reference potential

of the signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-13

Edition 04.2011

8.4.2 Application information

The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

A typical application is shown in the following diagram:

Fig. 8-6 Application example for SB10 interface module at the binary input-,

output module EB11

The binary signals of the plant/system side are connected directly with

the SIMADYN D modules via the interface module. A ribbon cable is

used (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables).

Other information

Example

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.4.3 Technical data

Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight Approx. 0.28 kg

ambient temperature for approbations max. 50° C

Description SIMADYN D

Power supply voltage (VV)

at the nominal value

24 V DC

Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC

Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated

Current drain

At the nominal value 1) 20 mA

Maximum current per power supply

cable

400 mA

1) LED current drain without the load of the system modules

The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply

for several interface modules.

No. 8

Nominal voltage value 24 V DC

Maximum current per channel 30 mA

General data

ambient

temperature

Power supply

Binary signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-15

Edition 04.2011

8.4.4 Connector assignment

To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further

informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components).

Terminal Designation

Channel 1 (binary input/output 1)

Channel 2 (binary input/output 2)

Channel 3 (binary input/output 3)

Channel 4 (binary input/output 4)

Channel 5 (binary input/output 5)

Channel 6 (binary input/output 6)

Channel 7 (binary input/output 7)

Channel 8 (binary input/output 8)

Reference rail, 1M (1P can be set)

Table 8-4 Assignment of the binary inputs and outputs of interface module SB10

The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is

0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

Flat connector X1

Terminal block X2

Conductor cross

section

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.4.5 Block diagram

Fig. 8-7 Block diagram of interface module SB10

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-17

Edition 04.2011

8.5 Interface module SB60

6DD1681-0AF4

8 binary input signals can be adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D /

SIMATIC TDC, electrically-isolated (floating) via optocouplers using the

SB60 interface module. The input signal voltage can be 120 V DC or AC.

There is protective separation between the eight binary inputs and the

SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC rack. The eight binary inputs are electrically

isolated with respect to one another.

• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails

• ribbon cable connector (X1):

− 8 pins for binary outputs

− 2 pins for 1P, 1M

• connector (X2), 2x 12 pins:

− 8 pins for binary inputs 120 V

− 8 pins for the reference point

• 1 terminal pair X3:

− 1P and 1M for the voltage on the SIMADYN D side

• LEDs for diagnostics

• optocouplers to electrically isolate input and output

The power supply at the SIMADYN D side is connected at terminal X3:

Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side

+24 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory

SM11 power supply connector for interface modules

(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter

“Installation and EMC guideline”.

WARNUNG Between inputs this interface module have a protective separation

The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective

separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 input

signals ).

Order No.

Description

Module design

Power supply on

the SIMADYN D

side

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P).

The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault

condition).

8.5.1 Signals

Signals up to a maximum of 120 V (nominal value) DC or AC can be

connected at the SB60 interface module.

The status of the binary interface module outputs (binary inputs for

SIMADYN D) is indicated using yellow LEDs (1...8).

There are two screw connections for each signal at

terminal strip X2:

• terminals 12, 22, ... up to 82 for binary signals 120 V

• terminals 11, 21, ... up to 81 for the reference point

NOTE To connect the signal lines to the terminals see “User manual FM 458-1

DP” chapter “Installation and EMC guideline”.

8.5.2 Application information

The interface module can only be vertically mounted due to the power

loss which has to be dissipated.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

Green LED

Red LED

Yellow LED

Other information

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-19

Edition 04.2011

8.5.3 Technical data

Mounting system Can be snapped onto mounting rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight Approx. 0.32 kg

Nominal power supply voltage

(VV)

24 V DC

Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC

Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated

Current drain at the nominal

value

90 mA

The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply

for several interface modules.

Number 8

Nominal input voltage 120 V AC/DC

‘1 signal’ 98 to 132 V

‘0 signal’ 0 to 33 V 1)

Input current (‘1 signal’) max. 3 mA

Insulation voltage Protective separation provided:

- between inputs and outputs

Electrical isolation provided:

- between input circuits

(with respect to one another)

Test voltage 1125V AC

1) Or open-circuit input

General data

Power supply

Binary inputs

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.5.4 Connector assignment

To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC

components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the

documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components).

Terminal 120 V Channel No.

Reference

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

120 V-input

120 V-Input

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Table 8-5 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB60

The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is

0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

flat connector X1

Binary inputs,

terminal block X2

Conductor cross

section

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-21

Edition 04.2011

8.5.5 Block diagram

IT41

IT42

EB11

SC50

Fig. 8-8 Block diagram of interface module SB60

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.6 Interface module SB61

6DD1681-0EB3

8 binary DC signals are adapted to the signal level of SIMADYN D /

SIMATIC TDC / S7-400 FM 458- components, electrically isolated

(floating) using the SB61 interface module.

• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails

• ribbon cable connector (X1):

− 8 pins for binary outputs

− 2 pins for 1P, 1M

• connector (X2), 2x 12 pin:

− 8 terminals for 24 V binary inputs

− 8 terminals for 48 V binary inputs

− 8 terminals for the reference point

• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (SIMADYN D-side power supply)

• 1 terminal pair X4: 2P, 2M (plant/system-side power supply)

• plug connector for the short-circuit connector

• double test socket X5: 2P (+), 2M (G)

• LED displays for diagnostics

• optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and

output

The SIMADYN D-side power supply is connected at terminal X3:

Terminal X3 Voltage SIMADYN D side

+24 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply

connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

The SIMADYN D power supply is indicated using a green LED (P).

The SIMADYN D power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault

condition).

Order No.

Description

Module design

Power supply on

the SIMADYN D

side

Green LED

Red LED

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-23

Edition 04.2011

8.6.1 Signals

The 24/48 V DC voltage for the plant/system side signals is available at

terminal block X4:

Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side

+24/48 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply

connector for interface modules

(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0).

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter

“Installation and EMC guideline”.

The power supply for the plant/system side is available at double test

socket X5 (G; +):

Double test socket X5 Voltage, plant/system side

+ (2P from X4)

G (2M from X4)

+24/48 V

0 V

WARNUNG Explosion Hazard

No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be

non-hazardous.

The status of the 8 signals is displayed, for each signal, using a yellow

LED (1...8).

There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal:

• terminals 1 to 8 for 24 V binary signals

• terminals 11 to 18 for 48 V binary signals

• terminals 51 to 58 as reference point

Power supply,

plant/system side

Test socket

Yellow LED

Terminal block for

binary signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.6.2 Application information

Plant/system-side signal voltages of 48V or 24V DC can be processed

using the interface module. The plant/system side of the module has 8

electrically isolated input channels. Using short-circuit connectors (X11),

the connection of each channel can be electrically isolated from one

another, or connected to a common reference point:

Plant/system side System side

Electrical

isolation

1/11

SB61

X11

M24V/48V

P24V/48V

Fig. 8-9 Position of the jumpers for inputs which are electrically isolated with respect to

one another

Plant/system side System side

Electrical

isolation

1/11

SB61

X11

M24V/48V

P24V/48V

Fig. 8-10 Position of the jumpers for inputs with common reference potential

CAUTION When supplied, all outputs have a common reference potential, i. e.

terminal pair X11 to X18 is equipped with two short-circuit connectors.

Electrically-

isolated inputs

(floating)

Inputs with

common reference

potential

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-25

Edition 04.2011

The jumpers (short-circuit connectors) are located in the section of the

housing cover facing away from the LEDs. These are only accessible

after the interface module has been removed.

The potential assignment between the plant- and system side is defined

as follows:

Reference potential of the inputs Position of the short-circuit

connector (jumper)

Inputs are additionally electrically-

isolated with respect to one another

Connector X1n1) :2:3 inserted

Inputs with common reference

potential

Connector X1n :1:2 and X1n :3:4

inserted

1) n = number of input 1 to 8

Table 8-6 Position of the jumpers

NOTE The potential reference can be separately set for each input.

The interface module can only be mounted vertically due to the power

loss which has to be dissipated.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

A typical application is shown in the following diagram:

Fig. 8-11 Application example for interface module SB61 at the binary input-, output

module EB11

Position of the

jumpers

Other information

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.6.3 Technical data

Mounting system Housing for snapping onto mounting

rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight Approx. 0.32 kg

ambient temperature for approbations max. 50° C

SIMADYN D Plant/system

side 24 V DC

Plant/system side

48 V DC

Power supply

voltage (VV)

24 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC

Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC 20 to 30 V DC 40 to 60 V DC

Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated

Current drain at the

nominal value

90 mA 50 mA 50 mA

The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply

for several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is

2 A, if this is the power supply for several interface modules.

Plant/system

side 24 V DC

Plant/system

side 48 V DC

No. 8 8

Input voltage for

‘1 signal’ 13 to 30 V DC 26 to 60 V DC

‘0 signal’ -3 to +6 V 1) -3 to +12 V 1)

Input current (‘1signal’) 6 mA 6 mA

1) Or open-circuit input

General data

ambient

temperature

Power supply

Binary inputs

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-27

Edition 04.2011

8.6.4 Connector assignment

To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further

informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components).

Terminal Inputs, electrically

isolated (floating)

Inputs with

common

reference point

Channel No.

+24 V input

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

+48 V input

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Input 24 V/48 V

2P(+24 V)

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Table 8-7 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB61

The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is

0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

flat connector X1

Binary inputs,

terminal block X2

Conductor cross

section

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.6.5 Block diagram

X2 X1

X11

X18

P24

M24

Fig. 8-12 Block diagram of interface module SB61

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-29

Edition 04.2011

8.7 Interface module SB70

6DD1681-0AG2

8 binary output signals from SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC are adapted to

the signal level of the plant/system via relays using the SB70 interface

module.

The output signal voltage can be up to max. 120 V DC or AC.

• housing which can be snapped onto mounting rails

• ribbon cable connector (X1):

− 8 pins for binary inputs

− 2 pins for 1P, 1M

• connector (X2), 2x 12pin

− 8 terminals for the NO contact

− 8 terminals for the NC contact

− 8 terminals for the center contact

• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P,1M (power supply on the SIMADYN D side)

• double test socket X5: 1P( + ), 1M ( G )

• LED displays for diagnostic purposes

• relay to provide electrical isolation between the input and output

• PTC thermistor as cable protection after the SIMADYN D-side power

supply

The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3:

Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN D side

+24 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply

connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter

“Installation and EMC guideline”.

Order No.

Description

Module design

Power supply on

the SIMADYN D

side

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

WARNUNG Between outputs this interface module have a protective

separation

The system side ( rack including 24V power supply ) have a protective

separation from touch dangerous voltage to the process side ( 8 output

signals ).

Between outputs they have only an electrical isolation.

The output signals on the process side only have an electrically (

galvanically ) isolation between each other. A mix with safety small

voltage and touch dangerous voltage is not allowed.

The SIMADYN D-side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).

The SIMADYN D-side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault

condition).

The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5

(G; +):

Double test socket X5 Voltage, SIMADYN D side

+ (1P of X3)

G (1M of X3)

+24 V

0 V

8.7.1 Signals

The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of

the signals (1...8).

There are three screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal to

the plant/system side:

• terminals 14, 24 ... up to 84 for NO contact

• terminals 12, 22 ... up to 82 for NC contact

• terminals 11, 21 ... up to 81 as center contact

The relay contact connections are determined as follows:

Quiescent state Connections (screw terminals)

Contact closed (NC contact)

Contact open (NO contact

n2 - n1 1)

n4 - n1

1) n: 1...8 depending on the channel No.

NOTE To connect the power supply see “User manual FM 458-1 DP” chapter

“Installation and EMC guideline”.

Green LED

Red LED

Test socket

Yellow LED

Terminal block for

binary signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-31

Edition 04.2011

8.7.2 Application information

The interface module can be mounted both vertically and horizontally

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

„General technical data“

A typical application is illustrated in the following diagram:

SIMADYN D side

Plant/system side

Interface

module SB70

Fig. 8-13 Application example for interface module SB70 at binary input-, output module

EB11

The binary inputs of the interface module are connected to the SIMADYN

D outputs via ribbon cables (refer to the Chapter Plug in cables).

Other information

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-32 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.7.3 Technical data

Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto mounting

rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight Approx. 0.37 kg

Power supply voltage (VV)

nominal value

24 V DC

Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC

Briefly t<500 ms 1,5 x Vrated

Current drain at the nominal value 150 mA

The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is the power supply

for several interface modules.

No. 8

Switching capability of the relay

contacts

120 V AC 2 A

120 V DC 0.4 A

60 V DC 1 A

< 35 V DC 2 A

Switching frequency max 20 Hz

Insulation voltage

Protective separation provided:

- between inputs and outputs

Electrical isolation provided:

- between input circuits

(with respect to one another)

Test voltage 1125V AC

General data

Power supply

Binary outputs

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-33

Edition 04.2011

8.7.4 Connector assignment

To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC

components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further informations see the

documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC components).

Terminal 120 V Channel No.

Center contact

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

NC contact

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

NO contact

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Table 8-8 Assignment of the binary inputs of interface module SB70, terminal block X2

The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is

0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

flat connector X1

Binary inputs,

terminal block X2

Conductor cross

section

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-34 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.7.5 Block diagram

X1 X2

11 14

Fig. 8-14 Block diagram of the SB70 interface module

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-35

Edition 04.2011

8.8 Interface module SB71

6DD1681-0DH1

8 binary DC signals from the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components system are adapted to the signal level of

the plant/system via the SB71 interface module.

• Housing which can be snapped-on to mounting rails

• Ribbon cable connector (X1):

− 8 pins for binary inputs

− 2 pins for 1P, 1M

• Connector (X2), 2x 8 pin

− 8 terminals for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC

− 8 terminals for the NC, contacts

• 1 terminal pair X3: 1P and 1M (power supply on the

SIMADYN D)

• 1 terminal pair X4: 2P, 2M (power supply on the

plant/system side)

• Double test socket X5: 1P(+), 1M(G)

• LED displays for diagnostic purposes

• Optocoupler to provide electrical isolation between the input and

output

The SIMADYN D power supply is connected at terminal X3:

Terminal X3 Voltage on the SIMADYN side

+24 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply

connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

The SIMADYN D side power supply is displayed using a green LED (P).

The SIMADYN D side power supply (1P, 1M) is short-circuited (fault

condition).

Order No.

Description

Module design

Power supply on

the SIMADYN D

side

Green LED

Red LED

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-36 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.8.1 Signals

The 24/48 V DC power supply voltage for the plant/system side signals is

connected at terminal block X4:

Terminal X4 Voltage, plant/system side

+24/48 V

0 V

To connect the power supply use accessory SM11 power supply

connector for interface modules (Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0)

The maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

To connect the power supply to the terminals X3 and X4 use accessory

SM11 power supply connector for interface modules

(Order No. 6DD1680-0BB0). The maximum conductor cross section on

terminals X3 and X4 is 2,5 mm².

The SIMADYN D power supply is available at the double test socket X5

(G; +):

Double test socket X5 Voltage, SIMADYN D side

+ (1P of X3)

G (1M of X3)

+24 V

0 V

WARNUNG Explosion Hazard

No connections are to be made to X5 unless the area is known to be

non-hazardous.

The status of the 8 signals is displayed using a yellow LED for each of

these signals (1...8).

There are two screw connections on terminal strip X2 for each signal:

• Terminals 1 to 8 for binary outputs, 24/48 V DC

• Terminals 51 to 58 as reference point

Power supply,

plant/system side

Connectors

Test socket

Yellow LED

Terminal block for

binary signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-37

Edition 04.2011

8.8.2 Application information

The interface module has a ribbon cable connector X1 to connect the

output signals of the SIMADYN D system (refer to the Chapter Plug in

cables), as well as a terminal strip X2 to connect the plant/system

signals.

The interface module may only be mounted vertically due to the power

loss which must be dissipated.

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section

"General technical data“!

CAUTION No more than three binary outputs may be simultaneously short-circuited

due to the maximum permissible power loss per interface housing.

The following diagram shows a typical application:

Fig. 8-15 Application example for interface module SB71 at binary input-, output module

EB11

Other information

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-38 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.8.3 Technical data

Mounting system Housing can be snapped onto

mounting rails

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight approx. 0.32 kg

ambient temperature for approbations max. 40° C

SIMADYN D Plant/system

side 24 V DC

Plant/system side

48 V DC

Power supply

voltage (VV)

24 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC

Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC 18 V to 60 V DC

Briefly t<500 ms 1.5 x Urated 1.5 x Vrated 1.5 x Vrated

Current drain at the

nominal value

55 mA 300 mA 360 mA

The maximun current on connector X3 is 1 A, if this is th power supply for

several interface modules. The maximun current on connector X4 is 2 A,

if this is th power supply for several interface modules.

System/plant

side, 24 V DC

System/plant

side 48 V DC

No. 8 8

Output voltage for 1 signal

for 0 mA output current (VV-0.6 V) (VV-1.2 V)

for 20 mA output current (VV-2.1 V) (VV-2.0 V)

for 30 mA output current (VV-2.7 V) (VV-2.9 V)

Max. output current for 1 signal

System/plant side <20,4 V DC

20 mA -

Output voltage for 0 signal 0 V 0 V

Max. output current (for 1 signal) 30 mA 1) 30 mA

1) The binary outputs are continuously short-circuit proof.

General data

ambient

temperature

Power supply

Binary outputs

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-39

Edition 04.2011

8.8.4 Connector assignment

To connect the interface module to the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components use cable SC62 or SC64 (for further

informations see the documentation of the SIMADYN D / SIMATIC TDC /

S7-400 FM 458- components).

Terminal Designation

1 Binary output 1

2 Binary output 2

3 Binary output 3

4 Binary output 4

5 Binary output 5

6 Binary output 6

7 Binary output 7

8 Binary output 8

51 0 V, binary output 1

52 0 V, binary output 2

53 0 V, binary output 3

54 0 V, binary output 4

55 0 V, binary output 5

56 0 V, binary output 6

57 0 V, binary output 7

58 0 V, binary output 8

Table 8-9 Assignment of binary outputs of interface module SB71

The minimun conductor cross section for the terminal block X2 is

0,2mm², the maximum conductor cross section is 2,5 mm².

flat connector X1

Binary outputs,

terminal strip X2

Conductor cross

section

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-40 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.8.5 Block diagram

P24/48

M24/48

Fig. 8-16 Block diagram of the SB71 interface module

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-41

Edition 04.2011

8.9 Interface modules SU10, SU11, SU12, SU13

SU10 6DD1681-0FG0

SU11 6DD1681-0EA1

SU12 6DD1681-0AJ1

SU13 6DD1681-0GK0

SU10 SU11 SU12 SU13

The interface module

SU10 is a

26-pin terminal block.

This is used to code

analog or binary signals

of a

26 pin ribbon cable

connector (SIMADYN D

side) on screw/plug-in

terminals (plant/system

side).

The interface module

SU11 is a

20-pin terminal block.

This is used to code

analog or binary signals

of a

20 pin ribbon cable

connector (SIMADYN D

side) on screw/plug-in

terminals (plant/system

side).

The interface module

SU12 is a

10-pin terminal block.

This is used to code

analog or binary signals

of a

10 pin ribbon cable

connector (SIMADYN D

side) on screw/plug-in

terminals (plant/system

side).

The interface module

SU12 is a

10-pin terminal block.

This is used to code

50 signals of a

50pin sub-D socket

connector (SIMADYN D

side) on screw/plug-in

terminals (plant/system

side).

SU10 26 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)

• 25 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or

binary signals

• 1 unassigned screw terminal connection

26 core ribbon cable X1

SU11 24 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)

• 20 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or

binary signals

• 4 unassigned screw terminal connections

20 core ribbon cable for connector X1

SU12 16 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)

• 10 screw terminal connections for plant/system side analog or

binary signals

• 6 unassigned screw terminal connections

10 core ribbon cable for connector X1.

ribbon cable, 10-core SIMADYN D-side analog- and binary signals

SU13 50 screw/plug-in terminals (X2)

• 50 signals are connected

• no electronic conversion

50 core screened round cable for connector X1.

Order No.

General

Module design

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-42 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.9.1 Function description

A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side ribbon cable connector X1 to

the plant/system-side screw terminal block X2 is established by using the

interface modules SU10 and SU11.

A 1:1 connection from the SIMADYN D-side connector X1 to the

plant/system-side spring-cage terminal block X2 is not established for all

signals by using the interface modules SU12 and SU13.

The following terminals have a fuse (0,5A slow-blow, internal resistance

0,25Ω) in the following signal lines:

Interface modules Terminal block X2

SU12 pin 1 – 8

SU13 pin 8, 17 – 23, 26 – 33, 36 – 43, 46 – 48

The following terminals have a protection diode ( Schottky- diode, BAT46

by Vishay) for the 24V power supply of the binary outputs in the following

signal lines:

Interface modules Terminal block X2

SU12 pin 10

SU13 pin 10

The following terminals have a ptc resistor (internal resistance 0,9Ω, e.g.

B59910-C120-A70 by Epcos) as short circuit protection for the 24V

power supply of the binary outputs in the following signal lines:

Interface modules Terminal block X2

SU12 pin 9

SU13 pin 9

The interface modules are designed so that signals can flow from both

sides. The process signals are coded without any additional electrical

isolation and signal processing.

Voltage range The maximum allowable voltages of the

modules, on which the interface modules

are connected, are to comply.

Current range max. 0.5 A

Table 8-10 Maximum permissible voltage- and current values for signal processing

Process signals

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-43

Edition 04.2011

8.9.2 Supplementary components

The following cables are required to connect the interface modules to the

modules:

Cable Module Plug connector

SC49 IT41 X6/X7

IT42 X8

SC50 IT42 X6

SC51 IT42 X7

Table 8-11 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU10

Cable Module Plug connector

SC55 EB11 X5

SC55 EB11 X6

SC12 EA12 X6

Table 8-12 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU11

Cable Module Plug connector

SC54 IT41 X6, X7

IT42 X8

SC13 EB11 X5, X6

SC7 PM5 X5

PM6 X5

SC64 FM458-1 DP X2

SC62 EXM438-1 X3

Table 8-13 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU12

Leitungstyp Baugruppen Steckverbinder

SC63 EXM 438-1 X1, X2, X3

Table 8-14 Modules and signal cables as supplementary components for SU13

Cables for

SU10

SU11

SU12

SU13

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-44 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

8.9.3 Application information

The interface modules can be mounted vertically and horizontally.

They are snapped onto a mounting rail, .

Further information on EMC and ambient conditions, refer to Section,

General technical data“

8.9.4 Pin/terminal assignment X1/X2

The screw terminal numbers of X2 are identical with the ribbon cable

connector numbering corresponding to the pin arrangement.

Interfacemodule Minimum conductor

cross section for the

terminal block X2

Maximum conductor

cross section for the

terminal block X2

SU10, SU11, SU12 0,2 mm² 2,5 mm².

SU13 0,2 mm² 1,5 mm².

25 25

Fig. 8-17 Circuit diagram, SU10

Other information

Conductor cross

section

SU10

Program memory modules / Interface modules

Hardware - SIMADYN D 8-45

Edition 04.2011

Fig. 8-18 Circuit diagram, SU11

X1 X2

10 10

1 1

8 8

9 9

PTC

2 2

Fig. 8-19 Circuit diagram, SU12

The components are described in chapter 8.9.1.

SU11

SU12

Program memory modules / Interface modules

8-46 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 04.2011

X1 X2

10 10

11 11

16 16

17 17

23 23

24 24

25 25

1 1

8 8

PTC

X1 X2

35 35

36 36

43 43

44 44

45 45

46 46

47 47

26 26

33 33

34 34

48 48

49 49

50 50

Fig. 8-20 Circuit diagram, SU13

The components are described in chapter 8.9.1.

8.9.5 Technical data

Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 129 x 160 mm

Weight Approx. 0.28 kg

ambient temperature for approbations

for interface modules

The maximum allowable ambient

temperatures of the modules, on which

the interface modules are connected,

are to comply.

SU13

General data

Ambient

temperature

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-1

Edition 06.2002

9 Plug-in cables

9.1 General information 9-2

9.2 Cable types 9-4

Overview

Plug-in cables

9-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

9.1 General information

The ribbon- and round cables are used to connect the following

components:

• CPU modules to interface modules

• input/output- and expansion modules with interface modules

• ITDC expansion module with SITOR thyristor sets

Insulation group According to VDE 0110, degree of pollution 2

Permissible operating peak

voltage

300 V, conductor with respect to ground

Permissible operating voltage 32 V, conductor to conductor

Max. current per cable 1 A

Max. resistance 220 Ohm/km

Cable width (ribbon cable) Core number x 1.27 mm

Table 9-1 General technical data

Description

General technical

data

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-3

Edition 06.2002

Cable overview with connection possibilities

Module Connec

tor

Cable Partial

connector

designation

Cable conversion Interface module which can be

connected

IT41 X6 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10

B SU10

SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

E SU12

IT41 X7 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10

B SU10

SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

E SU12

IT42 X6 SC50 15 pin to 26 pin. SU10

IT42 X7 SC51 25 pin to 26 pin. SU10

IT42 X8 SC49 A 50 pin to 2*26 pin SU10

B SU10

SC54 A 50 pin to 5*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

E SU12

EB11 X5 SC55 A 40 pin to 2*20 pin SU11

B SU11

SC13 A 40 pin to 4*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

EB11 X6 SC55 A 40 pin to 2*20 pin SU11

B SU11

SC13 A 40 pin to 4*10 pin SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

B SU12, SB10, SB70, SB71

C SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

D SU12, SB10, SB60, SB61

EA12 X6 SC12 20 pin to 20 pin. SU11

PM5/6 X5 SC7 10 pin to 10 pin. SU12

ITDC X7 SC17.2 50 pin to 50 pin. SITOR interface

ITDC X7 SC31.2 50 pin to 50 pin. SITOR interface

PM5/6 X4 SC57 Monitor/diagnostics PC

SS4 X5 SC57 Monitor/diagnostics PC

Table 9-2 Modules and the interface modules which can be connected

Plug-in cables

9-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

9.2 Cable types

Ribbon cable SC7 10 pin

Application Connects the 10-pin connector strip of a CPU module

with the 10-pin plug connector strip of an interface

module.

Features Unscreened ribbon cable

2 socket connectors, 10 pin

(1:1) connection, can be inserted from any direction

Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief

at both ends.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0AH0

Table 9-3 Ribbon cable SC7

Ribbon cable

SC12

20 pin, twisted pairs

Application Connects the 20 pin plug connector of an input/output

module with the 20 pin plug connector of an interface

module.

Features • unscreened ribbon cable

• twisted pairs

• two 20-pin socket connectors

• (1:1) connection

• can be inserted from any direction

Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief

at both ends.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0BC0

Table 9-4 Ribbon cable SC12

SC7

SC12

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-5

Edition 06.2002

Ribbon cable

SC13

40 pin / 4 x 10 pin

Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an

input/output module with the 10-pin plug connectors of

four interface modules.

Features • unscreened ribbon cable

• one 40-pin socket connector

• four 10-pin socket connectors with partial connector

labeling, A to D and the assignment

A: Pins 1 to 10

B: Pins 11 to 20

C: Pins 21 to 30

D: Pins 31 to 40

of the 40-pin socket connector

Cable ends Plug connectors according to DIN 41651 with strain relief

at both ends.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0BD0

Table 9-5 Ribbon cable SC13

2130

3140

17,3

Connector marking

Color coding

1. core

55,6

Fig. 9-1 Ribbon cable SC13

SC13

Plug-in cables

9-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

Ribbon cable

SC17.2

50 pin

Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module

with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an

SE20.2 interface module.

Features • screened round cable

• twisted pairs

• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 50-pin SUB-D socket connector

• (1:1) connection

Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are

provided at both ends

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0BH2

Table 9-6 Ribbon cable SC17.2

Ribbon cable

SC31.2

50 pin

Application Connects the SITOR interface of an expansion module

with the SITOR interface of a SITOR thyristor set or an

SE20.2 interface module.

Features • screened round cable

• twisted pairs

• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 50 pin SUB-D socket connector

• (1:1) connection

Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are

provided at both ends

Length 10 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0DB2

Table 9-7 Ribbon cable SC31.2

SC17.2

SC31.2

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-7

Edition 06.2002

Round cable

SC49

50 pin / 2 x 26 pin

Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an

expansion module with the 26-pin plug connectors of 2

interface modules.

Features • screened round cable

• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector

• two 26-pin socket connectors with partial connector

labeling A and B with the assignment

A: Pins 1 to 25

B: Pins 26 to 50

of the 50-core ribbon cable

Cable ends Expansion board: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN

41652

Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651

with strain relief.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0EK0

Table 9-8 Ribbon cable SC49

ca. 50

Shrinking tubing

Label glued on the cable

Shrinking tubing

2000 +/- 15

Fig. 9-2 Ribbon cable SC49

SC49

Plug-in cables

9-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

Round cable

SC50

15 pin / 26 pin

Application Connects the 15-pin SUB-D socket connector of an

expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an

interface module.

Features • screened round cable

• 15-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 26-pin socket connector

• (1:1) connection, pins 16 to 26 of the socket connector

are not assigned

Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to

DIN 41652

Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651

with strain relief.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0FA0

Table 9-9 Ribbon cable SC50

2000 +/- 0,1

Shrinking tubing

Fig. 9-3 Ribbon cable SC50

SC50

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-9

Edition 06.2002

Round cable

SC51

25 pin / 26 pin

Application Connects the 25 pin SUB-D socket connector of an

expansion module with the 26-pin plug connector of an

interface module.

Features • screened round cable

• 25-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 26-pin socket connector

• (1:1) connection, pin 26 of the socket connector not

assigned

Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to

DIN 41652

Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651

with strain relief.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0FB0

Table 9-10 Ribbon cable SC51

2000 +/- 15

Shrinking tubing

Fig. 9-4 Ribbon cable SC51

SC51

Plug-in cables

9-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

Round cable

SC54

50 pin / 5 x 10 pin

Application Connects the 50-pin SUB-D socket connector of an expansion

module with the 10-pin plug connectors of 5 interface modules.

Features • screened round cable

• 50-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 5, 10-pin socket connectors with printed partial connector

designations A to E with the assignment

A: Pins 1 to 10

B: Pins 11 to 20

C: Pins 21 to 30

D: Pins 31 to 40

E: Pins 41 to 50

of the 50-pin plug connector

Cable ends Expansion module: SUB-D plug connector according to DIN

41652

Interface module: Plug connector according to DIN 41651 with

strain relief.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0FE0

Table 9-11 Ribbon cable SC54

ca. 50

Shrinking tubing

2000 +/- 15

Shrinking tubing

Fig. 9-5 Ribbon cable SC54

SC54

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-11

Edition 06.2002

Sub-D connector Plug connector Sub-D connector Socket connector

Partial connect. A Partial connector D

1 1 11 1

34 2 44 2

18 3 28 3

2 4 12 4

35 5 45 5

19 6 29 6

3 7 13 7

36 8 46 8

20 9 30 9

4 10 14 10

Partial connect. B Partial connector E

37 1 47 1

21 2 31 2

5 3 15 3

38 4 48 4

22 5 32 5

6 6 16 6

39 7 49 7

23 8 33 8

7 9 17 9

40 10 50 10

Partial connect. C

24 1

8 2

41 3

25 4

9 5

42 6

26 7

10 8

43 9

27 10

Table 9-12 Ribbon cable SC54

Plug-in cables

9-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

Ribbon cable

SC55

40 pin / 2 x 20 pin

Application Connects the 40-pin plug connector of an input/output

module with the 20-pin plug connectors of two interface

modules.

Features • unscreened ribbon cable

• 1, 40-pin socket connector

• 2, 20-pin socket connectors with partial connector

designations A and B with the assignment

A: Pins 1 to 20

B: Pins 21 to 40

of the 40-pin socket connector

Cable ends Connectors according to DIN 41651 with tension relief at

both ends.

Length 2 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0FF0

Table 9-13 Ribbon cable SC55

12)

stamped on acc. to DIN 30640 A6 -sw

2000 +/- 15

Fig. 9-6 Ribbon cable SC55

SC55

Plug-in cables

Hardware - SIMADYN D 9-13

Edition 06.2002

Round cable

SC57

9 pin / 9 pin with 9-pin to 26-pin adapter

Application Connects a PC (COM 1 / 2, RS 232) with

the serial interface of a CPU module with cable 1, 10m

or a SS4 communications module (on CS7) with cable 1

and 2 (adapter), 10m + 0.5m

Features • screened round cable

• twisted pairs

• 26-pin SUB-D plug connector

• 9-pin SUB-D socket connector

Cable ends SUB-D plug connectors according to DIN 41652 are

located at both ends

Length 10 m, with adapter 0.5 m

Order No. 6DD1684-0FH0

Table 9-14 Ribbon cable SC57

500

Tinned

Cable ends

aligned

Item Halve the rubber gasket (S.-N.:087650)

and insert both parts above one

another over the cable

Leave 9mm screen

and fold back over the

sheath. Remove the

transparent foil

Contact assignment

X3 X4

Item Shrink tubing (fold the

screen back over the sheath)

Part 2

SS4

10 18

1) 1)

1) Mounting position taken into account

2) Label glued on

3) Screw-in the screws provided into the housing

2) Label 2

9-pin socket 26-pin plug

connector.

Fig. 9-7 Ribbon cable SC57

SC57

adapter for

CS7/SS4

Plug-in cables

9-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 06.2002

Part 1

Part 2

-X2

-X1

RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT

round cable, screened

SUB-D, 9-POHLIG

STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:

PC (Com 1)

SUB-D, 9-pin

connector marking

PC (Com 1)

SUB-D, 9-POLIG

STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:

SUB-D, 9-pin

connector marking

-X4

-X3

RUNDKABEL, GESCHIRMT

round cable, screened

SUB-D, 9-POLIG

STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:

SUB-D, 9-pin

connector marking

SUB-D, 26-POLIG

STECKERBESCHRIFTUNG:

SS4

SUB-D, 26-pin

connector marking

SS4

Fig. 9-8 Ribbon cable SC57

SC57

cables 1 and 2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-1

Edition 03.2001

10 Operator control panel OP2

10.1 Function overview 10-2

10.2 Process data handling 10-3

10.3 Binary value processing 10-5

10.4 System operation 10-10

10.5 System run-up 10-18

10.6 Handling OP2 errors 10-20

10.7 Front panel 10-24

10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting 10-25

10.9 Battery change 10-26

10.10 Connecting elements 10-26

10.11 Power supply 10-27

10.12 Baud rates 10-27

10.13 Cables and connectors 10-27

10.14 Using a printer with OP2 10-29

10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips 10-30

Overview

Operator control panel OP2

10-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.1 Function overview

The OP 2 is an operator control device for the SIMADYN D system. It offers

the following functionality:

MSG

Process data handling

Displays and processes up to 24 process data. 2 process

data are always displayed.

BIN

Binary value processing

Displays and processes up to 32 binary values

MSG

Message system

Autonomous message system for P32 messages from

SIMADYN D. Messages are saved, sorted according to the

time they were received, and can be deleted. Only one

message is displayed at any one time (max. 80 characters).

MSG

SYS

System message

Messages which come directly from OP2

SYSTEM

System operation

Changing and saving the basic function

SIEMENS

Numerical pad

Two-line display

40 characters per line

MSG BIN SYSTEM

VAL MSG

SYS

V10

V11

V12

+/-

Enter

SEL SHIFT DIM CHG EPROM

Process data panels V1...V12

Binar

value ke

s B1..B4

PRN

DEL

ACT

OLD

SIMADYN OP 2

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-3

Edition 03.2001

10.2 Process data handling

Process data handling is selected using the VAL key. The LED in the key is

lit if process data handling has been selected (the VAL key).

10.2.1 General information

Two of a total of 24 process data can be simultaneously displayed (upper

and lower display line). The 24 values are sub-divided into two panels

(V1..V12 + SHIFT) for easier selection.

The sub-division of the two panels according to setpoints and actual values

can be configured as required (for instance, 20 actual values can be

configured or just 3). The sub-division according to setpoints and actual

values is exclusively configured in SIMADYN D.

The selected process data values are always displayed normalized, in

accordance with the pre-setting (default) together with dimension and name.

If a name has not been configured, then the „VALUE xy“ (xy = 1 ..24)

designator is displayed as default value.

If a non-configured process data is selected, then operating message No. 14

(„NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“) is displayed. This text is displayed

for 3 seconds, and then the previous value is re-displayed.

ACCESS

VALUE 24

-0.123456789012345 Rev/min

-17.365195745 E-55 POUNDS

Designator Value Dimensions

% data

10.2.2 Behavior at run-up

The OP2 automatically goes into the process data handling mode after it has

been initialized. The last selected values are displayed again. At first run-up,

the first two configured values are displayed (normally V1 and V2). If only

one process data has been configured, then operating message No. 14 is

displayed in the lower display line („NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“).

If no process data have been configured at the SIMADYN D side, the OP2

goes into the basic message system processing function. If process data

handling is selected at a later time, then operating message No. 14 is

displayed in the upper line („NO MEASURED VALUE INITIALIZED“). The

text is displayed until another basic function is selected.

VAL key

Process data

Operator control panel OP2

10-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.2.3 Operator control overview for process data handling

VAL: Displays process data

- The two last selected process data are displayed (Default: VALUE V1 and V2)

SEL: Selects process data

- The select functions V1...V12/SHFT/DIM are activated

- The designator in the active display line flashes

- The active display line changes if the key is again depressed

CHG: Changes setpoints

- The change mode for the selected process data is enabled

- A change currently being made is cancelled

- Operating message No. 5 "SETPOINT CHANGE INHIBITED", if an ACTUAL VALUE was selected

(configured)

E2 PROM: Saving changes in the SIMADYN D EPROM

- Activate the memory function

- The LED flashes until the function has been completed with Enter

- Operating message No. 35 "SAVE EPROM UNSUCCESSFUL". A value

is not accepted if there is an error condition

SHIFT DIM

VAL

Enter

SEL

CHG

EPROM

Value transfer

V1 V2

...

Selects process data

V1...V12: Measured value 1...24

SHIFT: Toggles

between the process

data panels

LED dark: V1...V12

LED lit: V13...V24

DIM: Toggling the

representation type

between values with

dimension and value as

a percentage

Decrease

value

Increase

value

Changing a value using the continuous

change keys and TIP operation

Entering a new value

Enter

Numerical

keypad Entering a new value

Toggling between

mantisse and exponent

for floating-point numbe

Cursor position

Terminate and transfer

the change

Correction

backspace key

Cursor position

MSG BIN

SYSTEM MSG

SYS VAL

Running functions are CANCELED

Return to

display operation

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-5

Edition 03.2001

10.3 Binary value processing

SIEMENS

Two-line display

40 characters per line

MSG BIN SYSTE

VAL MSG

SYS

V10

V11

V12

+/-

Enter

SEL SHIFT DIM CHG EPROM

PRN

DEL

ACT

OLD

SIMADYN OP 2

Processing binary KEYS B1...B4

(bin. values 1...4)

Processing the binary value menus

(bin. values 5.32)

Up to 32 binary values can be processed. (BIN and B1..B4). The binary

values cannot be saved in the SIMADYN D EPROM. If this is required, then

the binary values should be configured as process data in SIMADYN D.

Binary values are processed using two mechanisms:

Keys B1 - B4 can always be selected, unless system processing has been

selected (SYSTEM).

The LED in the four binary keys indicates whether the appropriate binary

value is „0“ (LED is dark) or „1“ (LED is lit). The status is inverted when

depressed.

Each time the KEY is depressed, the LED flashes until SIMADYN D

acknowledges the change.

If the binary values were not configured on the SIMADYN D side, then the

LEDs in keys B1 to B4 remain dark (i. e. the keys have no effect).

Overview

Binary keys

B1 - B4

Operator control panel OP2

10-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

BIN

Starts the binary value menu / binary values B5 to B32 are

processed.

SIGNAL9 SIGNAL10 SIGNAL11 SIGNAL12

Name (can be configured in SIMADYN D)

default name: SIGNAL No.

Status display:

- as display 0/1

- as text alternative (configurable text)

- ----if not configured

0 FULL OFF - - - -

Enter Change

0/1 changeover

Select the next

or previous

binary value

The status display flashes after each action until SIMADYN D acknowledges

the change.

MSG BIN

SYSTEM MSG

SYS VAL

Running functions are cancelled

No function

10.3.1 Message system processing

The OP2 combines all of the incoming messages into its own message

system which can administer up to 30 messages (save). If more messages

are received, then the first messages are overwritten (ring buffer

mechanism) and an overflow message is entered into the buffer.

Operating message No. 15 („NUMBER OF LOST MESSAGES: xx“), xx

specifies the number of messages which have been overwritten.

Only one message can be displayed at any one time. OP2 sorts all of the

received messages into chronological order.

An OP2 does not have to administer all messages, transmitted from

SIMADYN D. Message classes are allocated, which are specified when

parameterizing the OP2, which are then used as selection criterion as to

which messages should be administered by OP2. All messages can be

permitted, or 1, 2 or 3 message class areas.

The message classes are defined in SIMADYN D when configuring the

message system (refer to the system software and configuring D7-SYS;

message class = prefix).

The message system processing is selected via the MSG key. After being

selected, the key LED is lit (bright). If OP2 hasn’t received any messages,

then after selection, operating message No. 16 is displayed („NO

MESSAGES AVAILABLE“). The text remains until either a message is

received, or another function is selected (e. g. VAL key).

If the OP2 has received new messages from SIMADYN D (since the last

time that message system processing was selected), then the MSG-key

LED flashes if the message system processing is not selected.

When the message system processing is re-selected, the last selected

message is displayed again. When the key is repeatedly depressed, the

latest message is displayed. You can scroll through the selected OP2

message system using the raise/lower keys.

Binary value

processing

Evaluating the

message class

areas

Operator control

overview for

message

processing

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-7

Edition 03.2001

The sequence for depressing the various keys for all functions in the

message processing are now listed. OP2 rejects illegal key combinations

with an appropriate message.

MSGBIN

SYSTEM MSG

SYS VAL

Running functions are cancelled

Jump to the latest message

10.3.2 Message on the display

OP2 displays messages in two different message formats. The two message

formats are:

• ASCII-text messages: They consist of:

Date/time, message type, message text and process data/dimensions

• Prefix/suffix messages: They consist of:

Date/time, message type, prefix, suffix and process data/dimension

Date/time consist of day, month, year, hour, minute, seconds and

milliseconds.

Message types: Warning, fault, communications error and system error.

The syntax/representation types of the message system must be used.

Process data/dimensions are optional information in a message and are

exclusively dependent on the software configured in SIMADYN D.

The configuring engineer decides, on the SIMADYN D side, which format is

displayed, when configuring the message system.

Further information

is provided in the User Documentation for the SIMADYN D system software

and configuring D7-SYS.

The OP2 displays the messages configured in SIMADYN D as follows:

MSG: Selecting the message system processing

- the message operation is re-selected (displays the last selected message)

- jumps to the latest message

VAL

Selects the next most recent

or next oldest message

ACT + DEL: Deletes

the currently

displayed message

DELETE PRINT

DEL

ACT +DEL

OLD +PRN

ACT +

PRN

OLD +

OLD + DEL: Deletes

all old messages

including the

currently displayed

message

ACT + DEL: Prints

the currently

displayed message

OLD + DEL: Prints

all old messages

including the

currently displayed

message

Messages on the

display

Operator control panel OP2

10-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

Possible message formats

Prefix/suffix Text Evaluation and display on the OP2

no no Message is not administered.

yes no The prefix is evaluated as message class. If the

message class is permissible, the message is

administered (stored) in the prefix/suffix format.

no yes Messages without prefix/suffix, with text, are always

administered in the OP2.

yes yes Prefix is evaluated as message class. If it is valid, the

message is administered (stored) in the text format.

If process data (with dimensions) is included in a message, then the OP2

„cuts“ the message text after 28 characters if it is longer (independent as to

whether a dimension is available or not). The message text may be up to 56

characters long if there is no process data.

If the message text is shorter than the maximum length, then the remaining

characters are filled with „blanks“; i. e. the display stays „dark“ at these

positions. Thus, the following message format is provided at the display

(2x40 characters) (d=day, m=month or minutes, y=year, h=hours,

z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.):

1) Message with process data (and dimension): Max. 28 message

characters

dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF

28 CHARACTERS ARE HERE!!-999.12345678 E+99

DIMENSION

2) Message without process data: Max. 56 message characters

dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T A MAX. OF

56 CHARACTERS COME FROM SIMADYN D!!!!

Example for a message in the ASCII text format with measured value

(without dimension):

01.10.94 00:00:05:167 W THE MOTOR RUNS

WITH UE CURRENT -99999.1234567 E+99

For the „prefix/suffix“ format, the following message formats can be

displayed on the OP2 display (d=day, m=month or minute, y=year, h=hour,

z=milliseconds, T=message type (warning, fault etc.):

1) Message with process data (and dimension):

dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P:54321 S:54321

-999.12345678 E+99 DIMENSION

2) Message without process data:

dd.mm.yy hh:mm:ss.zzz T P54321 S:54321

10.3.3 Message print-out

The OP2 defines the message format at the printer, so that 2 display lines (i.

e. a complete message) are combined to form a printer line. OP2

automatically inserts a line break after each message. A message is

therefore always 80 characters long; the character length at the printer

should be appropriately set. OP2 does not change the message structure.

ASCII text message

Prefix/suffix

message

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-9

Edition 03.2001

The user can print-out all of the acquired messages using the PRINT/OLD or

PRINT/ACT keys (the two keys should be simultaneously depressed).

For OLD/PRINT, all of the messages including the presently displayed

message, are printed. For ACT/PRINT, that message is printed, which is

being currently displayed.

The messages are not automatically deleted after having been printed.

Messages are printed using the DEL key.

When parameterizing OP2, it should be specified as to whether messages

should be printed immediately after they have been received in the OP2

(refer to "Parameterizing for the message system processing")

If YES is entered, then the messages are printed-out immediately after the

message telegram has been received. With this type of print-out, there is no

guarantee that the messages are printed-out in the correct chronological

sequence.

Characters 1-40 Characters 41-80

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

11.10.94 20:13:44:571 W MO TO R No . 4 HAS SPEED: -999.121234567E+01 RPM

Print control

Deleting messages

Automatic printing

Operator control panel OP2

10-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.4 System operation

In system operation, the basic settings (operating parameters) for the OP2

are defined. The settings are permanently saved in the OP2 flash memory.

SYSTEM

Depress the SYSTEM key for longer than 3 sec.

10.4.1 Function overview

The following menu appears in system operation:

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

Enter Start the functionCURSOR

Select the function

Operator control

Function Definition

MESSAGE Parameterization for message system processing

VALUE Parameterization for process data processing

USS-INTERFACE Parameterizing the USS interface to SIMADYN D

PRINTER Parameterizing the printer interface

DISPLAY-OPTIONS Selecting the language for all OP2 messages

Selection

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-11

Edition 03.2001

10.4.2 Parameterizing the message system processing

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Function selection

Message

Message Class

Print Message

Description:

The message class areas, which can be configured as prefix, are specified,

which are accepted from OP2

- Input 0 in area 1 deletes all entries. All messages are accepted from the BUS

- Selecting a displayed message is realized as for example, area 2

MESSAGE CLASS MESSAGE

1-100 150-150 12000-15000 0000

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Default "ALL"

CURSOR

Value selection

Nuermical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display: (example)

Description:

If the parameter is set to YES, all of the thre received messages are

immediately output via the printer interface

PRINT MESSAGE DIRECTLY MESSAGE

YES NO YES

CURSOR

Value selection

Enter Transfer

Display:

Enter

Operator control panel OP2

10-12 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.4.3 Parameterizing for process data

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Selects the function

VALUE

Host Response Time

Change Frequency

Description:

SIMADYN D response time when acknowledging process data changes

(HOST RESPONSE TIME)

HOST RESPONSE TIME (SEC) VALUE

10 1...10

Numerical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display:

Enter

Change Delay

Description:

Repeat cycle (ms) for setting the value using the raise/lower keys.

CHANGE FREQUENCY (MS) VALUE

200 100...500

Numerical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display:

Description:

Delay time (ms) between depressing the key until the action is repeated.

CHANGE DELAY (MS) VALUE

800 100...800

Numerical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display:

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-13

Edition 03.2001

10.4.4 Parameterizing for the USS interface

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Function selection

Station-Address

Baudrate

Description: Node number (station address)

The node number (station address) on the USS bus is defined using this

parameter. If a node number (station address) is not entered, then the

device does not establish a connection to SIMADYN D.

STATION-ADDRESS USS-INTERFACE

7 0..31

Numerical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display:

Enter

Delay Time

Description:

Baud rate of the USS bus

BAUDRATE (KBAUD) USS-INTERFACE

9,6 9, 6 19, 2 93, 75 187, 5

Enter Transfer

Display:

Description:

Cycle time monitoring of the USS MASTER

DELAY-TIME (ms) USS-INTERFACE

100 0...100

Numerical

keypad

Enter Transfer

Value input

Display:

USS-Interface

Area 1

CURSOR

Function selection

Operator control panel OP2

10-14 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.4.5 Parameterization for the printer

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Function selection

PRINTER

Baud rate Description: Baud rate for the printer interface:

BAUDRATE (KBAUD) PRINTER

9, 6 2, 4 4, 8 9, 6

Enter Transfer

Display:

Enter

CURSOR

Function selection

Data bits Description: Character format, data bits (DATA BITS):

DATABITS PRINTER

8 7 8

Enter Transfer

Display:

CURSOR

Function selection

Parity Description: Character format, parity (PARITY):

PARITY PRINTER

EVEN EVEN ODD

Enter Transfer

Display:

CURSOR

Function selection

Stop bits Description: Character format, stop bits (STOP BITS)

STOP BITS PRINTER

2 1 2

Enter Transfer

Display:

CURSOR

Function selection

LINE TYPE Description: Toggling the printer INTERFACE between a TTY-

and V24 connection

LINE TYPE PRINTER

TTY V24 TTY

Enter Transfer

Display:

CURSOR

Function selection

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-15

Edition 03.2001

10.4.6 End of system operation

SYSTEM operation is terminated by selecting END and depressing the

ENTER key.

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Function selection

END

END Description:

If the BUS has to be re-initialized to SIMADYN D,

"YES" should be entered, otherwise, "NO".

INIT REQUEST

YES YES NO

Enter Transfer

Display:

Enter

CURSOR

Function selection

10.4.7 Parameterizing the display options

MESSAGE VALUE USS-INTERFACE

PRINTER END DISPLAY-OPTIONS

CURSOR

Function selection

PRINTER

Languages Description:

Selects the OP2 system message languages (the menu language in

"SYSTEM operation" is always English).

D = German, I = Italian, F =French, E = Spanish

LANGUAGE DISPLAY-OPTIONS

D ENGLISH D I F E

Enter Transfer

Display (Example):

Enter

CONTRAST Description: CONTRAST display setting

CONTRAST DISPLAY-OPTIONS

1 0...15

Enter Transfer

Display:

Numerical

keypad

Value in

CURSOR

Function selection

10.4.8 Self-test

The user can test all of the OP2 sub-components using the self-test. The

self-test function can only be accessed from system operation.

Operator control panel OP2

10-16 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

System operation is selected by depressing the SYSTEM key (longer than 3

seconds). The self-test is started by simultaneously depressing the

keys. The particular function is selected using the cursor keys and

acknowledged with ENTER.

The test menu is displayed:

DISPLAY USS-INTERFACE KEYBOARD

PRINTER-INTERFACE END HARDWARE

Various test patterns are continuously written into the display. Display errors

can be identified by visually checking these optical patterns on the screen.

The test is terminated with ENTER.

Cyclic data are transmitted via the USS bus, and they are simultaneously

received and checked. The USS interface can be checked using a short-

circuit plug connector. During the test, the following message is shown on

the upper display line: „USS-INTERFACE TEST -> ENTER FOR END“. After

the test has been terminated, the following message is indicated on the

lower display line: „USS-INTERFACE OK“ or „USS-INTERFACE ERROR“

(the test is terminated with ENTER). The short-circuit plug-connector

assignment is:

PIN RS 485 Selbsttest

3 Data P TxD+

4 RxD+

5 GND GsND

6 +5V +5V

8 TxD-

9 Data N RxD-

A test telegram is output at the printer via the printer port. The printer port

can be checked using a short-circuit plug connector. The test is terminated

with ENTER.

Assignment of the short-circuit plug connector:

Port assignment SS 1 and SS 2 A

PIN General V.24 TTY

1 Screen

2 RxD-

3 RxD

4 TxD

5 CTS

6 TxD+

7 TxD-

8 Screen

9 RxD+

10 RTS

11 +20mA

12 GND GND

13 +20mA

14 +5V

15 GND

15 9

The test is terminated with ENTER.

Starting the self-

test

DISPLAY TEST

USS INTERFACE

TEST

PRINTER

INTERFACE TEST

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-17

Edition 03.2001

The OP2 tests the internal memory. The OP2 shows the operating status in

the upper display line „RAM-EPROM-FLASH-TEST“.

The actual test step is displayed in the lower line. When errors occur, OP2

stays at that particular test step and issues the message „TEST ERROR“. If

no errors are detected, OP2 returns to the self-test menu after the test has

been completed. The test takes approximately two minutes.

Message texts during testing:

WRITE READ TEST OF RAM

CALCULATE CHECK SUM OF EPROM

WRITE READ TEST OF FLASH

End of the self test and the OP2 returns to the SYSTEM mode.

Hardware

END

Operator control panel OP2

10-18 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.5 System run-up

OP2 is powered-up by switching-on the +24V power supply voltage. All of

the connections must be correct to ensure perfect functioning of the unit:

• USS connecting cable to SIMADYN D

• printer cable (if a printer is connected).

• power supply cable

After being powered-up, the „OP2 Version V1.0“ message is displayed for

approximately 5 seconds (the actual firmware version is displayed).

OP2 then goes into an automatic hardware test routine. The following

messages occur one after the another during this test routine:

EPROM ok Error EPROM -memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)

RAM ok Error RAM-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)

FLASH-TEST Error FLASH-memory failure (OP2 defect/replace)

Error FLASH-memory erased

Error FLASH-memory chsum wrong

- incorrect contents/checksum of the FLASH memory

- FLASH is re-initialized

- run-up with DEFAULT initialization

TEST ok

FLASH-TEST

- - -

The OP2 then automatically establishes a communications link to SIMADYN

10.5.1 Establishing a communications link to SIMADYN D

After a successful self-test, OP2 establishes a communications link to the

SIMADYN D subracks.

This procedure can either be initiated by SIMADYN D or by the OP2. This is

realized as follows

• SIMADYN D: After resetting or powering-up the subrack power supply.

• OP2: After powering-up the OP2 power supply voltage or, optionally,

when exiting the SYSTEM mode (for menu item „INIT REQUEST“ in the

main menu „END“).

When OP2 starts to establish the link, the following message is displayed

„INITIALIZATION REQUESTED“ (upper display line). After the first data

have been exchanged with SIMADYN D, the process values are

automatically initialized (message in the lower display line: „PROCESS

DATA INITIALIZATION“) and then the binary value initialization (message in

the lower display line: „BINARY VALUE INITIALIZATION“).

Power-on

Hardware test

Establishing the

communications

link

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-19

Edition 03.2001

If all of the initialization data have been completely loaded into the OP2, OP2

automatically goes into the process data display mode (refer to the Chapter

"Process data processing").

OP2 remains in the particular initialization step until it has been completed.

Depending on the particular configured software, it can take up to a minute

to establish the communications link. This link can only be established after

the SIMADYN D subrack has run-up.

If an attempt is made to select operating modes, process data- or binary

value display while the link is being established, OP2 ignores this attempt.

However, received message telegrams are processed.

If errors occur when establishing a communications link, an appropriate

system message is generated and the LED in the key SYSMSG starts to

flash. The message can then be read-out by depressing the SYSMSG key.

OP2 waits until the error has been rectified.

The following errors can occur:

• No activity on the USS bus (S24 system message). This message is

set once when OP2 runs-up, and disappears as soon as the first

telegram is transferred along the bus.

− SIMADYN D subracks are not powered-up or are running-up.

− BUS coupling is not available or faulted, cable not inserted.

− baud rate incorrectly set.

• No SCAN telegram with node number (station number) of the OP2

after the protocol monitoring time has expired (system message

S25).

− the incorrect BUS address is set in OP2

− SIMADYN D configuring incorrect.

• Transfer error (system message S4). The message only appears until

the correct telegram has been received.

− line fault, incorrect baud rate.

• Erroneous INIT data The received data are logically erroneous.

− cable fault, incorrect baud rate.

− check the configured software.

The errors must be rectified. The OP2 can then be re-initialized, initiated via

the system mode.

Errors when

establishing the

link

Operator control panel OP2

10-20 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.6 Handling OP2 errors

OP2 has two types of error messages:

• System messages: The messages can be analyzed using the SYSMSG

key. (refer to Chapter "OP2 error handling).

• Operating messages: The messages are displayed for approx. 3

seconds and then automatically disappear. (refer to Chapter "Operating

messages").

10.6.1 System messages

If OP2 identifies an error during parameterization, initialization or in cyclic

operation, an appropriate error message is entered into the system error

field and the LED in the SYSMSG key starts to flash.

MSG BIN

SYSTEM MSG

SYS

VAL

Running functions are canceled

No function

Onl

ossible after the INIT

hase

MSG

SYS Function selection

Scroll through all active messages

If there is no active message: The following message is displayed

No. 19 (NO SYSTEM ERROR)

The message can be displayed using the SYSMSG key. All of the error

messages and associated error causes and corrective actions are now

subsequently described. The errors cannot be acknowledged.

The cause must be removed, otherwise error-free operation is not

possible.

These are the system messages:

No Text Description /cause/ corrective

action

Reference

(Chapter)

10 INITIALIZATION

ERROR MEASURED

VALUE NO.

INIT telegram error for a process

data. Repeat initialization. Check

configuring.

2.2.1

18 NO PRINTER BUFFER

FREE

The printer cannot print-out a

message fast enough. Messages

are lost. Check the printer and

printer connection.

1.4.6

19 NO SYSTEM ERROR System mode: There are no active

error messages

23 DATA TRANSFER

ERROR, CHECK

HARDWARE,

Data transfer errors occur on the

USS bus:

- faults on the cable

- incorrect baud rate

- BUS conflict on the USS bus

2.2

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-21

Edition 03.2001

No Text Description /cause/ corrective

action

Reference

(Chapter)

- defective BUS cable

24 SYSTEM ERROR Device not able to function. Critical

faults/errors in the electronics.

General

information

25 INIT. ERROR, NO

MEASURED VALUE

INIT. DATA

Process data haven’t been

completely initialized. OP2 expects

additional process initialization

data. OP2 is not ready. Check the

BUS structure and configuring.

2.3

26 INIT. ERROR, NO

BINARY VALUE INIT.

DATA

Process data haven’t been

completely initialized. OP2 expects

additional process initialization

data. OP2 is not ready. Check the

BUS structure and configuring.

2.3

27 INIT. ERROR,

MEASURED VALUE

INIT. DATA

The initialization data for the

process data are erroneous. The

OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS

structure and configuring

2.3

28 INIT.ERROR, BINARY

VALUE - INIT. DATA

The initialization data for the

process data are erroneous. The

OP2 is not ready. Check the BUS

structure and configuring.

2.3

29 MEASURED VALUE

CHANGE ERROR

Error when changing the process

data. Changing process data in the

VAL/CHANGE mode was

unsuccessful. Repeat the function,

if required check configuring.

1.2.3

30 INITIALIZATION ERROR,

DELAY

Initialization time monitoring

(watchdog) exceeded. OP2 not

ready. Check the BUS structure

and configuring.

2.3.2

31 INTERRUPTION TO THE

HOST CONNECTION

No USS telegrams are received.

Check the BUS connection/cable.

2.2

32 NO BUS CONNECTION,

INCORRECT STATION

ADDRESS

No telegrams with their own

particular station address received.

Configuring error or BUS address

incorrectly set.

2.2 + 1.5.4

33 PRINTER NOT READY

OR NOT CONNECTED

OP 2 does not print. The printer

does not respond. Check the

printer and printer cable.

1.4.6

35 EPROM SAVE

UNSUCCESSFUL

Saving the VAL/CHG/ mode in the

EPROM unsuccessful, check

configuring.

1.2.3

36 TELEGRAM ERROR, NO

BUS CIRCULATION

Check the BUS structure, check

the configuring, master is not

transmitting SCAN telegram with

the OP node number.

2.2

10.6.2 Operating messages

Information texts, alarms (warnings) and fault/error messages are displayed

as operating messages for approximately three seconds, in order to support

the operator resolve problems.

Operator control panel OP2

10-22 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

No Text Description /cause/ corrective

action

Reference

(Chapter)

1 MEASURED VALUE NOT

INITIALIZED

A process data number V1..V24

was selected which was not

configured in SIMADYN D

1.2

2 FUNCTION NOT

PERMISSIBLE

This function is not permissible in

this mode.

General

information

3 UPPER LIMIT

EXCEEDED

The configured upper limits were

exceeded when a setpoint was

entered or changed.

1.2

4 LOWER LIMIT FALLEN

BELOW

The configured lower limit was

fallen below when entering a

setpoint or changing it

1.2

5 SETPOINT CHANGE

INHIBITED

When selecting the change mode

for a process data, SIMADYN D

did not enable the change.

Presently occupied/changed by

another OP or, was configured as

ACT value.

1.2

6 LAST CHANGE STILL

NOT ACCEPTED

SIMADYN D did not accept the last

process data change. Repeat the

function or check the configuring.

1.2

7 DELAY TIME EXPIRED SIMADYN D has still not accepted

the actual process data change.

The monitoring time (watchdog)

exceeded. Repeat the function or

check the configuring.

1.2

8 FUNCTION NOT

POSSIBLE

A key was depressed which is not

possible in the current mode.

General info

9 INCORRECT INPUT An invalid value has been entered General info

11 INITIALIZATION

RUNNING

OP2 waits for general INIT DATA.

OP2 not ready, if required, check

BUS structure and configuring.

2.2.1

12 MEASURED VALUE

INITIALIZATION

OP2 waits for process data

initialization. OP2 not ready, if

required check BUS structure or

configuring.

2.2.1

13 BINARY VALUE

INITIALIZATION

OP2 waits for BINARY VALUE

initialization. OP2 not ready, if

required, check BUS structure or

configuring.

2.2.1

14 NO MEASURED VALUE

INITIALIZED

No process data were initialized

and configured, VAL function is not

possible

1.2

15 NUMBER OF LOST

MESSGES:

Message processing overflow

message. This message is entered

into the message buffer as the

latest message. The most recent

messages overwrite the oldest

messages. The number of lost

messages is incremented until

messages are deleted using DEL.

1.4

17 NO FURTHER

MESSAGES PRESENT

The end of the messages has been

reached when scrolling through the

message buffer.

1.4

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-23

Edition 03.2001

No Text Description /cause/ corrective

action

Reference

(Chapter)

20 RAM-TEST

UNSUCCESSFUL,

REPLACE THE UNIT

OP2 has an electronics defect and

is not functioning: Self-test

message

2.1.2

21 FLASH TEST

UNSUCCESSFUL,

REPLACE THE UNIT

OP2 has an electronics defect and

is not functioning: Self-test

message

2.1.2

22 EPROM-INCORRECT

EPROM CHECKSUM,

REPLACE THE UNIT

OP2 has an electronics defect and

is not functioning: Self-test

message

2.1.2

34 INITIALIZATION

REQUESTED

OP2 waits for initialization data 2.3

35 EPROM SAVE

UNSUCCESSFUL

VAL/CHG/ save mode

unsuccessful in the EPROM

Check configuring.

1.2.3

37 PRINTER INTERFACE

Self-test message

38 DEFECTIVEW PRINTER

INTERFACE

Self-test message

39 CALCULATING EPROM

CHECKSUM

Self-test message

40 RAM READ/WRITE TEST Self-test message

41 FLASHRAM

READ/WRITE TEST

Self-test message

42 TEST OK Self-test message

Operator control panel OP2

10-24 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.7 Front panel

OP2 has a two-section aluminum housing, consisting of an extruded housing

frame and a rear cover panel. At the front, the unit has degree of protection

IP65, and at the rear, IP20. OP 2 has ventilation slots at the top and bottom.

The housing frame includes:

• slots to accept labeling strips (for example to label the function keys)

• the front panel with membrane keypad and LEDs

SIEMENS

Two-line display

each line 40 characters

MSG BIN MSG SYSTEM

VAL SYS

V10

V11

V12

+/-

Enter

SEL SHIFT DIM CHG E2

EPROM

Membrane keypad

PRN

DEL

ACT

OLD

SIMADYN OP 2

Housing frame

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-25

Edition 03.2001

10.8 Unit dimensions and mechanical mounting

OP2 can be mounted in cabinets or control desks:

• mounting cut-out: 230 x 158 mm

• mounting depth: 40 mm

• max. front panel thickness: 16 mm

NOTE The following points must be observed when mounting the OP:

• sufficient space for protruding connectors must be provided below

the mounting cut-out (a minimum of 20 mm when using standard

cables)!

• check that the seal is correctly located!

• the tabs of the labeling strips must not be clamped behind the front

panel!

• the ventilation air slots in the housing may not be covered when the

unit is mounted!

• OP2 must be protected from direct solar radiation!

• insert the unit in the cut-out and ensure that it doesn’t fall until it has been

screwed into place.

• the labeling strip tabs may not be clamped-in.

Back panel

Threaded spindle

llen ke







• Mount the unit using the screw tensioners in the front panel; insert the

screw tensioners in the OP housing and rotate the threaded spindles

against the front panel.

Mounting

measures:

Operator control panel OP2

10-26 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.9 Battery change

The lithium battery is used to back-up the operating data in the static RAM

and to supply the CMOS clock module when the power supply is off.

NOTE The battery may only be changed with the power supply voltage

powered-up in order to prevent data loss!

1. Remove the battery cover and remove the battery from its holder.

2. Remove the battery connector from the cable

3. Insert the new battery in the reverse order

Observe the EMC guidelines and the safety-related information.

Ordering spare parts:

Siemens AG, Gerätewerk-Karlsruhe

Lithium battery 3.6 V, 1800 mAh, Order No.: W79084-E-1001-B2

WARNING

DANGER

• For safety reasons, it is not permissible that lithium batteries are in

the equipment when it is transported unless the battery

manufacturer permits this expressly using an appropriate

declaration.

• When the equipment is stored and shipped, the batteries must be

individually and separately packed in a non-conductive material.

• There is a danger of explosion if they are not correctly handled. We

can accept no liability for incorrectly handled batteries.

• Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with national and

European legislation and regulations.

• The lithium batteries must be removed from the battery holder

before the subrack or power supply is disposed of.

10.10 Connecting elements

R S48 5

Ground connection

Terminal block / power supply

DR210/211-N, DR230/231-N

Printer

V.24/TTY

USS-

USS master

SS1/IF1 SS2A/IF2A SS2B/IF2B

OP2

(

Lower side of the unit

)

Not used (V.24/TTY)

SIMADYN

Changing the

battery:

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-27

Edition 03.2001

10.11 Power supply

The 4-pole terminal block is used to connect the power supply voltage and

the authorization input. The authorization input is not used.

Connecting the individual conductors

7 mm

Conductor cross-section: 0.5 ...2.5mm

Terminal block connections

0 V

+24V DC

Power supply voltage

Not used

10.12 Baud rates

OP2 can be used on the USS bus with the following baud rates: 9.6 / 19.2 /

93.75 / 187.5 kbaud.

10.13 Cables and connectors

OP2 is always connected to interface SS2B

(RS-485 / USS-BUS).

PIN RS 485

3 Data B

5 GND

6 +5 V

8 Data A

Fig. 10-1 Assignment SS 2B

NOTE When connecting to an RS-485 bus (e. g. SS4 communications

module):

Data B = RS485+

Data A = RS485-

Connector

assignment

Operator control panel OP2

10-28 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

The connection is realized via a 9-pin sub-D connector with the following

circuit configuration:

A) Connection as a node (station) at the center of the BUS

DATA B

DATA A

(3)

(8) BUS cable

9-pin sub-D

B) Connected as node at the end of the BUS (with bus termination):

BUS-Kabel

9-polig Sub-D

150Ω

390Ω

(6)

(3)

(8)

(5)

+5 V

Data B

Data A

End

A bus terminating resistor network must be installed in connector 4 (refer

to the appropriate information specified with communications module SS4)

Bus connection

and cable

Operator control panel OP2

Hardware - SIMADYN D 10-29

Edition 03.2001

10.14 Using a printer with OP2

10.14.1 Configuring the printer

The OP2 printer interface at the unit can be parameterized in two settings:

1. XON/XOFF protocol; formatted message texts are transferred to a

printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting.

2. XON/XOFF protocol with ETX/ACK; formatted message texts are

transferred to a printer, whereby OP2 specifies the formatting. After each

message, OP2 transmits an ETX (End of Text), which is acknowledged

by the printer (e. g. Mannesmann Tally printer) with ACK (acknowledge).

Only then can OP2 transmit a new message.

10.14.2 Printer connection

A printer is always connected at interface SS1 of the OP2.

Pre-assembled cables are available for Siemens printers DR210-N / DR211-

N / DR230-N / DR231-N:

• 6XV1 440-2B... for TTY data transfer

• 6XV1 440-2C... for V.24 data transfer

...= length code, refer to Catalog ST80

These cables can also be used for PT 88/89/90 printers. If required you

must assemble a different cable for other printers.

NOTE Siemens AG accepts no liability for incorrect functioning and damage

which are caused by using self-assembled cables or cables from third-

parties!

PIN General V.24 TTY

1 Screen

2 RxD-

3 RxD

4 TxD

5 CTS

6 TxD+

7 TxD-

8 Screen

9 RxD+

10 RTS

11 +20mA

12 GND

13 +20mA

14 +5V

15 GND

15 9

Fig. 10-2 Assignment SS 1 and SS 2

Operator control panel OP2

10-30 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Edition 03.2001

10.15 Labeling and replacing the labeling strips

The function keys of the OP2 are labeled with B1 to B4 and V1 to V12 when

they are shipped from the factory. A set of (4 x) unlabeled strips are provided

with the OP2 so that customers can make their own key labels. When these

labels are used, they cover the standard labels.

CAUTION Before inserting the labeling strips, the labeling must be smear proof,

as a membrane keyboard, cannot be cleaned inside. The front panel

can only be replaced by a service workshop incurring considerable

costs.

If necessary, remove old labeling strips at the tabs.

Carefully insert label strips with smear-proof labeling.

SS1/IF1 SS2A/IF2A SS2B/IF2B

OP2

(Lower unit side)

Fig. 10-3 Lower side of the unit showing the labeling strips

If the OP2 is already mounted, we recommend that the screw tensioners are

released and the unit is carefully raised towards the front out of the cut-out.

NOTE Do not suspend the OP 2 at its connecting cables!

The following dimension drawing shows the individual labeling strips and the

visible fields (which can be used for labeling):

14,2

3 x 16,7 = 50,1

16,7 2,5

14 (4x)

Fig. 10-4 Dimension drawing, labeling strips

If you make your own labeling strips using the dimension drawing above,

observe that they should not be more than 0.1 mm thick!

Hardware - SIMADYN D I-1

Edition 05.2006

Index

Communications carrier module CS8 ........................................................................................... 6-8

Communications module SS4..................................................................................................... 6-31

SS4 at OP2 or VD1 .................................................................................................................. 6-33

Communications module SS5, SS52 .......................................................................................... 6-41

Communications subrack CS7......................................................................................................6-2

Conversion

Plug-in cables............................................................................................................................. 9-3

Converter control ITDC ............................................................................................................... 5-45

Coupling memory module MM11, MM3, MM4 .............................................................................. 4-2

CPU module PM5.......................................................................................................................... 3-2

CPU module PM6........................................................................................................................ 3-11

CS12-CS22

Application information............................................................................................................. 6-19

Cascading ................................................................................................................................ 6-18

Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-15

Slave connection...................................................................................................................... 6-16

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-19

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-20

CS7

Application information............................................................................................................... 6-4

Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-7

Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-2

Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-3

Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 6-6

CS8

Application information............................................................................................................... 6-9

Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 6-11

Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-8

Interface to the communications module ................................................................................... 6-8

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-11

CSH11

Application information............................................................................................................. 6-13

Connecting to SINEC H1 ......................................................................................................... 6-12

Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 6-13

Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-12

Parameterizing interface .......................................................................................................... 6-12

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-14

EA12

Adjustment procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-2

Analog outputs ........................................................................................................................... 5-5

Application information............................................................................................................... 5-4

Connection diagram ................................................................................................................... 5-6

Index

I-2 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

Connector assignments..............................................................................................................5-4

Description..................................................................................................................................5-2

Noise signals .............................................................................................................................. 5-2

Supplementary components.......................................................................................................5-2

Technical data ............................................................................................................................5-5

EB11

Application information .............................................................................................................5-13

Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................5-14

Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................5-14

Cables ........................................................................................................................................5-8

Connection diagram .................................................................................................................5-15

Connector assignments..............................................................................................................5-9

Description..................................................................................................................................5-7

Supplementary components.......................................................................................................5-8

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................5-14

Terminal assignments ................................................................................................................5-9

EP3 with IS_x

Description................................................................................................................................3-17

IS_1,IS_2 and IS_3 ..................................................................................................................3-17

Expansion module IT41...............................................................................................................5-16

Expansion module IT42...............................................................................................................5-33

Fiber-optic cable subrack coupling CS12-CS22 .........................................................................6-15

I/O module EA12 ...........................................................................................................................5-2

I/O module EB11 ...........................................................................................................................5-7

Interface module SB10................................................................................................................8-11

Interface module SB60................................................................................................................8-17

Interface module SB61................................................................................................................8-22

Interface module SB70................................................................................................................8-29

Interface module SB71................................................................................................................8-35

Interface module SE13.1...............................................................................................................8-4

Interface module SE26.1...............................................................................................................8-7

Interface modules

Overview of plug-in cables .........................................................................................................9-3

Interface submodule SS2 ............................................................................................................6-27

IT41

15 V incremental encoder ........................................................................................................ 5-29

5 V incremental encoder ..........................................................................................................5-30

Analog inputs............................................................................................................................5-28

Analog outputs..........................................................................................................................5-28

Application information .............................................................................................................5-27

Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................5-29

Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................5-29

Block diagram...........................................................................................................................5-16

Cables ......................................................................................................................................5-19

Coding connector .....................................................................................................................5-18

Connection diagram .................................................................................................................5-31

Connector assignments............................................................................................................5-20

Description................................................................................................................................5-16

Inputs and outputs....................................................................................................................5-16

Index

Hardware - SIMADYN D I-3

Ausgabe 05.2006

Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-27

Interrupt inputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-30

Interrupt reset outputs .............................................................................................................. 5-30

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-19

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-28

IT42

Analog inputs, integrating......................................................................................................... 5-42

Analog inputs, sampling ........................................................................................................... 5-42

Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-43

Application information............................................................................................................. 5-41

Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-43

Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-43

Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-33

Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-34

Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-44

Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-35

Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-33

Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-33

Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-41

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-34

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-42

ITDC

Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 5-53

Application information............................................................................................................. 5-55

Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 5-53

Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-54

Block diagram........................................................................................................................... 5-47

Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 5-48

Coding plug .............................................................................................................................. 5-45

Connecting diagram ................................................................................................................. 5-55

Connector assignments ........................................................................................................... 5-49

Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-45

Incremental encoders 15 V ...................................................................................................... 5-54

Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-45

Mounting/installation................................................................................................................. 5-54

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 5-48

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 5-53

ITSL

Application information............................................................................................................. 6-21

Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-21

Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................... 6-21

Installation ................................................................................................................................ 6-21

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 6-21

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 6-22

MM11, MM3, MM4

Description ................................................................................................................................. 4-2

Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 4-7

MM3

Radio clock DCF-77 ................................................................................................................... 4-4

Real-time clock........................................................................................................................... 4-3

Module CSH11 ............................................................................................................................ 6-12

MS5, MS51, MS52

Index

I-4 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

Description..................................................................................................................................8-2

Program size ..............................................................................................................................8-2

Technical data ............................................................................................................................8-3

OP2

Battery change .......................................................................................................................10-26

Cables and connectors...........................................................................................................10-27

Connections............................................................................................................................10-26

Function overview ....................................................................................................................10-2

Installation ..............................................................................................................................10-25

Operating messages ..............................................................................................................10-21

Printer operation.....................................................................................................................10-29

Process data handling..............................................................................................................10-3

System message....................................................................................................................10-20

Operator panel OP2 ....................................................................................................................10-2

Plug-in cables ................................................................................................................................9-2

Cable types.................................................................................................................................9-4

Conversion .................................................................................................................................9-3

Description..................................................................................................................................9-2

How they can be connected to modules ....................................................................................9-3

Overview.....................................................................................................................................9-3

Ribbon cable SC13 ....................................................................................................................9-5

Ribbon cable SC17.2 .................................................................................................................9-6

Ribbon cable SC31.2 .................................................................................................................9-6

Ribbon cable SC7 ......................................................................................................................9-4

Ribbon cables SC55.................................................................................................................9-12

Round cable SC12 .....................................................................................................................9-4

Round cable SC49 .....................................................................................................................9-7

Round cable SC50 .....................................................................................................................9-8

Round cable SC51 .....................................................................................................................9-9

Round cable SC54 ...................................................................................................................9-10

Round cable SC57 ...................................................................................................................9-13

Technical data ............................................................................................................................9-2

PM5

7-segment display ......................................................................................................................3-5

Absolute value encoder..............................................................................................................3-4

Button .........................................................................................................................................3-6

Connection diagram .................................................................................................................3-10

Connector assignments..............................................................................................................3-7

Description..................................................................................................................................3-2

Incremental encoder...................................................................................................................3-4

Inputs..........................................................................................................................................3-3

Interface module.........................................................................................................................3-4

Performance data.......................................................................................................................3-2

Program memory module...........................................................................................................3-3

Program size ..............................................................................................................................3-3

Programming..............................................................................................................................3-2

Real-time clock...........................................................................................................................3-6

Select connections .....................................................................................................................3-3

Service interface.........................................................................................................................3-3

Index

Hardware - SIMADYN D I-5

Ausgabe 05.2006

Software protection .................................................................................................................... 3-6

Supplementary components ...................................................................................................... 3-7

Technical Data ........................................................................................................................... 3-8

PM6

7-segment display .................................................................................................................... 3-13

Application instructions............................................................................................................. 3-15

Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 3-12

Button ....................................................................................................................................... 3-14

Connection diagram ................................................................................................................. 3-16

Description ............................................................................................................................... 3-11

Interface module....................................................................................................................... 3-12

Performance data..................................................................................................................... 3-11

Program memory module......................................................................................................... 3-12

Program size ............................................................................................................................ 3-11

Programming............................................................................................................................ 3-11

Real-time clock......................................................................................................................... 3-14

Service interface....................................................................................................................... 3-12

Softwareschutz......................................................................................................................... 3-14

Supplementary components .................................................................................................... 3-15

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 3-15

Program memory modules MS5, MS51, MS52............................................................................. 8-2

Radio clock DCF-77

Clock setting............................................................................................................................... 4-5

Receive status............................................................................................................................ 4-6

Time display ............................................................................................................................... 4-5

Ribbon cable

40 core 4 x 10 core..................................................................................................................... 9-5

Ribbon cable

10 core SC7 ............................................................................................................................... 9-4

40 core/2 x 20 core SC55 ........................................................................................................ 9-12

50 core SC17.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6

50 core SC31.2 .......................................................................................................................... 9-6

Ribbon cable SC13 ....................................................................................................................... 9-5

Ribbon cable SC17.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6

Ribbon cable SC31.2 .................................................................................................................... 9-6

Ribbon cable SC55 ..................................................................................................................... 9-12

Ribbon cable SC7 ......................................................................................................................... 9-4

Round cable

15 core/26 core SC50 ................................................................................................................ 9-8

20 core, twisted pairs SC12 ....................................................................................................... 9-4

25 core/26 core SC51 ................................................................................................................ 9-9

50 core/2 x 26 core SC49 .......................................................................................................... 9-7

50 core/5 x 10 core SC54 ........................................................................................................ 9-10

9 core SC57 ............................................................................................................................. 9-13

with Adapter SC57 ................................................................................................................... 9-13

Round cable SC12 ........................................................................................................................ 9-4

Round cable SC49 ........................................................................................................................ 9-7

Round cable SC50 ........................................................................................................................ 9-8

Round cable SC51 ........................................................................................................................ 9-9

Round cable SC54 ...................................................................................................................... 9-10

Round cable SC57 ...................................................................................................................... 9-13

Index

I-6 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

S12 and SR24

Number of slots ........................................................................................................................2-13

SB10

Application information .............................................................................................................8-13

Binary signals ...........................................................................................................................8-14

Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-16

Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-15

Description................................................................................................................................8-11

Signals......................................................................................................................................8-12

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-14

SB60

Application information .............................................................................................................8-18

Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................8-19

Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-21

Connector assignment .............................................................................................................8-20

Description................................................................................................................................8-17

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-19

Terminal assignments ..............................................................................................................8-17

SB61

Application information .............................................................................................................8-24

Binary inputs.............................................................................................................................8-26

Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-27

Description.......................................................................................................................8-22, 8-28

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-26

Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................8-23

Test socket ...............................................................................................................................8-23

SB70

Application information .............................................................................................................8-31

Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................8-32

Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-34

Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-33

Description................................................................................................................................8-29

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-32

SB71

Application information .............................................................................................................8-37

Binary outputs...........................................................................................................................8-38

Block diagram...........................................................................................................................8-40

Connector assignments............................................................................................................8-39

Description................................................................................................................................8-35

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-38

Test socket ...............................................................................................................................8-36

SC12..............................................................................................................................................9-4

SC13..............................................................................................................................................9-5

SC17.2...........................................................................................................................................9-6

SC31.2...........................................................................................................................................9-6

SC49..............................................................................................................................................9-7

SC50..............................................................................................................................................9-8

SC51..............................................................................................................................................9-9

SC54............................................................................................................................................9-10

SC55............................................................................................................................................9-12

SC57............................................................................................................................................9-13

Adapter for CS7/SS4................................................................................................................9-13

SC7................................................................................................................................................9-4

Index

Hardware - SIMADYN D I-7

Ausgabe 05.2006

SE13.1

Application information............................................................................................................... 8-5

Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-4

T element ................................................................................................................................... 8-4

Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-5

Voltage divider............................................................................................................................ 8-5

SE26.1

Application information............................................................................................................... 8-8

Connecting example................................................................................................................... 8-8

Connector assignment ............................................................................................................... 8-9

Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-7

Diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 8-10

Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 8-9

Signal processor module EP3 with IS_x ..................................................................................... 3-17

SIMOLINK interface ITSL............................................................................................................ 6-21

SR12 and SR24

Installation Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 2-19

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-21

SR12 and SR24

Backplane buses ...................................................................................................................... 2-17

Backplane connector................................................................................................................ 2-18

Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-16

Connection assignment............................................................................................................ 2-14

Daisy chain-jumpers................................................................................................................. 2-17

Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-13

Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-15

Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-15

Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-13

Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-19

SR12 and SR24 subracks........................................................................................................... 2-13

SR12 und SR24

Technische Daten .................................................................................................................... 2-21

SR6 and SR6V

Backplane bus............................................................................................................................ 2-5

Battery back-up .......................................................................................................................... 2-4

Connection elements.................................................................................................................. 2-2

Daisy chain jumper..................................................................................................................... 2-5

Description ................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 2-11

Installation Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 2-7

Power supply.............................................................................................................................. 2-2

Technical data ............................................................................................................................ 2-8

Ventilation/cooling ...................................................................................................................... 2-6

SR6 and SR6V subracks............................................................................................................... 2-2

SRT400

Battery back-up ........................................................................................................................ 2-28

Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-26

Input voltage............................................................................................................................. 2-27

Mounting guidelines and noise immunity ................................................................................. 2-28

Output voltage .......................................................................................................................... 2-27

Power supply............................................................................................................................ 2-26

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 2-29

Ventilation/cooling .................................................................................................................... 2-28

SRT400

Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2

Index

I-8 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006

Dimension drawing...................................................................................................................2-31

SS1

Description................................................................................................................................6-23

Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................6-26

Recommended connection.......................................................................................................6-23

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-26

SS1 interface submodule ............................................................................................................6-23

SS2

Description................................................................................................................................6-27

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-28

SS31

Description................................................................................................................................6-29

Enabling the transmitter ...........................................................................................................6-29

Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................6-29

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-30

SS31 interface submodule ..........................................................................................................6-29

SS4

Carrier module CS7..................................................................................................................6-31

Configuration Guidelines ..........................................................................................................6-36

Connector assignment .............................................................................................................6-39

Description................................................................................................................................6-31

Diagnostic functions .................................................................................................................6-37

Diagnostics interface X5...........................................................................................................6-38

Interface....................................................................................................................................6-31

PC.............................................................................................................................................6-31

Programmer..............................................................................................................................6-31

Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-36

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-40

USS connection for PO2, VD1PC ............................................................................................6-33

SS5

Parameterizing .........................................................................................................................6-42

SS5, SS52

Configuration Guidelines ..........................................................................................................6-43

Connector assignments............................................................................................................6-44

Description................................................................................................................................6-41

Diagnostics LED.......................................................................................................................6-43

Profibus ....................................................................................................................................6-41

Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 6-42

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................6-45

SS52

Drive program...........................................................................................................................6-42

Parameterizing .........................................................................................................................6-42

SS53load..................................................................................................................................6-42

SU10, SU11, SU12 and SU13

Application information .............................................................................................................8-44

Function description .................................................................................................................8-42

General.....................................................................................................................................8-41

Pin assignment.........................................................................................................................8-44

Process signals ........................................................................................................................8-42

Supplementary components..................................................................................................... 8-43

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................8-46

Terminal assignment ................................................................................................................8-44

Subrack SRT400 .........................................................................................................................2-26

Index

Hardware - SIMADYN D I-9

Ausgabe 05.2006

T400

Absolute value encoders............................................................................................................ 7-7

Analog inputs............................................................................................................................ 7-13

Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................... 7-13

Binary inputs............................................................................................................................. 7-13

Binary outputs .......................................................................................................................... 7-14

Coarse/fine pulse evaluation...................................................................................................... 7-4

Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-2

Incremental encoder................................................................................................................... 7-4

Incremental encoder 15 V ........................................................................................................7-14

Inputs/outputs............................................................................................................................. 7-3

Mechanical design...................................................................................................................... 7-4

Parameters............................................................................................................................... 7-10

Serial interfaces.......................................................................................................................... 7-7

Software protection .................................................................................................................... 7-4

Synchronizing............................................................................................................................. 7-9

Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 7-12

Terminal assignment................................................................................................................ 7-10

Terminals.................................................................................................................................... 7-4

Technical data SIMADYN D

Ambient conditions................................................................................................................... 1-18

Application and operation........................................................................................................... 1-4

Cabinet ....................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Cables ...............................................................................................................................1-6, 1-14

Connecting external voltages..................................................................................................... 1-6

Design- und EMC Guidelines..................................................................................................... 1-2

ESD .......................................................................................................................................... 1-15

Installation .................................................................................................................................. 1-6

Installation clearances.............................................................................................................. 1-10

Installation in equipement ........................................................................................................ 1-14

Introduction................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Potential bonding........................................................................................................................ 1-6

Power loss in the cabinet ......................................................................................................... 1-11

Power supply............................................................................................................................ 1-12

Protective grounding .................................................................................................................. 1-9

Radios ........................................................................................................................................ 1-9

Shipping modules..................................................................................................................... 1-17

Subracks.................................................................................................................................. 1-13

Technology module T400.............................................................................................................. 7-2

Technology subrack SRT400........................................................................................................ 7-2

Index

I-10 Hardware - SIMADYN D

Ausgabe 05.2006